See in Reader
Replaced additional forms of "it would be clearer" with "it would be misunderstood" (#2238)
Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee <larry.sallee@unfoldingword.org> Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2238 Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee <lrsallee@noreply.door43.org> Co-committed-by: Larry Sallee <lrsallee@noreply.door43.org>
This commit is contained in:
Larry Sallee
parent
9d047e38f5
commit
26ffb844fb
|
|
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ RUT 3 10 bjw9 הֵיטַ֛בְתְּ חַסְדֵּ֥ךְ הָאַחֲר
|
|||
RUT 3 10 e7ka הֵיטַ֛בְתְּ חַסְדֵּ֥ךְ הָאַחֲר֖וֹן 1 You have made your covenant faithfulness better at the end This refers to Ruth asking Boaz to marry her. Boaz sees this as Ruth showing unselfish kindness and family loyalty to Naomi. By marrying Naomi’s relative, Ruth would also provide for Naomi, honor Naomi’s son, and continue Naomi’s family line.
|
||||
RUT 3 10 cbd3 הָרִאשׁ֑וֹן 1 at the beginning This refers to the way that Ruth had earlier provided for her mother-in-law by staying with her and gleaning grain for food for them.
|
||||
RUT 3 10 n84d figs-idiom לְבִלְתִּי־לֶ֗כֶת אַחֲרֵי֙ 1 by not going after **because you have not looked for marriage among**. Ruth could have ignored Naomi’s need and looked for a young and handsome husband for herself outside of Naomi’s relatives, but she did not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
RUT 3 11 jdr6 grammar-connect-logic-result וְעַתָּ֗ה 1 Connecting Statement: This phrase indicates that what came before in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in verse 11. This can be indicated with a word like **Therefore**. If it is clearer in your language to put the reason after the result, the order would be: Boaz is motivated to perform the role of kinsman-redeemer (verse 11) **because** he has seen how much kindness Ruth has shown to Naomi (verse 10). If you choose this order, you will need to combine the verses and the verse numbers (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]).
|
||||
RUT 3 11 jdr6 grammar-connect-logic-result וְעַתָּ֗ה 1 Connecting Statement: This phrase indicates that what came before in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in verse 11. This can be indicated with a word like **Therefore**. If it would be misunderstood in your language to put the reason after the result, the order would be: Boaz is motivated to perform the role of kinsman-redeemer (verse 11) **because** he has seen how much kindness Ruth has shown to Naomi (verse 10). If you choose this order, you will need to combine the verses and the verse numbers (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]).
|
||||
RUT 3 11 ei93 בִּתִּי֙ 1 my daughter Boaz used this expression as a sign of respect toward Ruth as a younger woman. Use the form of address that would be appropriate in your language.
|
||||
RUT 3 11 ab08 figs-idiom כָּל־שַׁ֣עַר עַמִּ֔י 1 the whole gate of my people The gate was an area of the city where people gathered to do business, and the leaders met there to make decisions. So this was an idiom meaning “all of the important people in my city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]).
|
||||
RUT 3 11 ab31 אֵ֥שֶׁת חַ֖יִל 1 a woman of worth **a woman of good character**, **a good woman**
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ EZR 1 3 k839 figs-distinguish לִירוּשָׁלִַ֖ם אֲשֶׁ֣ר ב
|
|||
EZR 1 3 gxbj figs-metaphor בֵּ֤ית יְהוָה֙ 1 Here, **house** figuratively means a temple. Cyrus continues to speak of this temple as if it would be a house in which Yahweh lived, since Yahweh’s presence would be there. Alternate translation: “a temple for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 1 3 o6x4 figs-distinguish יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל ה֥וּא הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר בִּירוּשָׁלִָֽם׃ 1 Here Cyrus provides further background information to inform his subjects who Yahweh is. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, the God whom the people of Israel worship, who should have a temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
|
||||
EZR 1 3 agt1 figs-possession אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 The phrase **the God of Israel** does not mean that God belongs to Israel, but that this is the God whom Israel worships. Alternate translation: “the God whom Israel worships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
EZR 1 4 t7ux וְכָל־הַנִּשְׁאָ֗ר מִֽכָּל־הַמְּקֹמוֹת֮ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ יְנַשְּׂא֨וּהוּ֙ אַנְשֵׁ֣י מְקֹמ֔וֹ 1 Whoever survives in any place where he lives, let the people in that place help him The structure of this sentence may present difficulties for translation because the long phrase at the beginning actually describes who will receive the action, rather than who will do the action. To make things clearer for your readers, you could say first who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Let the people who live in any place where Jewish survivors are in exile help them”
|
||||
EZR 1 4 t7ux וְכָל־הַנִּשְׁאָ֗ר מִֽכָּל־הַמְּקֹמוֹת֮ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ יְנַשְּׂא֨וּהוּ֙ אַנְשֵׁ֣י מְקֹמ֔וֹ 1 Whoever survives in any place where he lives, let the people in that place help him The structure of this sentence may present difficulties for translation because the long phrase at the beginning actually describes who will receive the action, rather than who will do the action. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say first who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Let the people who live in any place where Jewish survivors are in exile help them”
|
||||
EZR 1 4 fr03 figs-idiom וְכָל־הַנִּשְׁאָ֗ר 1 This phrase refers to any Israelite who is a surviving member of the group that was taken into exile, or who is a descendant of someone in that group. The word **remaining** refers to people who are remaining or left over from a larger group. In this context, that larger group is all of the Israelites who lived in the land of Judah before the Babylonians conquered it. Alternate translation: “Any survivor of the Jews who were taken from their land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 1 4 vvzw figs-idiom מִֽכָּל־הַמְּקֹמוֹת֮ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ 1 **Sojourning** means living somewhere other than in one’s native land. Here, **he** refers to any Jew such as is described in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “in any of the places where a Jew may be living in exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 1 4 uoep אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ 1 Saying **where** and **there** in the same phrase like this is a characteristic Hebrew construction, but it might represent an unnecessary duplication in your language. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could omit any translation of the word “there.” Alternate translation: “in which he is living”
|
||||
EZR 1 4 uoep אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ 1 Saying **where** and **there** in the same phrase like this is a characteristic Hebrew construction, but it might represent an unnecessary duplication in your language. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could omit any translation of the word “there.” Alternate translation: “in which he is living”
|
||||
EZR 1 4 p5jk figs-gendernotations יְנַשְּׂא֨וּהוּ֙ אַנְשֵׁ֣י מְקֹמ֔וֹ 1 It is likely that both women and men would have helped to gather the supplies listed in the rest of this verse to support the returning Jews. So the term **men** here probably includes both groups. Alternate translation: “the people of that place should help him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
EZR 1 4 d9rn figs-idiom יְנַשְּׂא֨וּהוּ֙ 1 **Lift** here is an idiom that means help. Alternate translation: “let … help him by providing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 1 4 f6tk figs-explicit הַ֨נְּדָבָ֔ה 1 The book expects readers to know that these would be extra gifts, beyond the necessities already listed. They might include money to help rebuild the temple and vessels to be used in the temple, such as the ones listed in [1:7–11](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “any extra gifts that they want to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ EZR 3 2 eg3w figs-activepassive כַּכָּת֕וּב בְּתוֹרַ֖
|
|||
EZR 3 2 gjpk figs-distinguish מֹשֶׁ֥ה אִישׁ־הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Moses was. Alternate translation: “Moses, that godly man” or “Moses, that man who knew God well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
|
||||
EZR 3 2 h7xj translate-names מֹשֶׁ֥ה 1 **Moses** is the name of a man. It occurs many times throughout the book, and it will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 3 3 mo49 grammar-connect-logic-result וַיָּכִ֤ינוּ הַמִּזְבֵּ֨חַ֙ עַל־מְכ֣וֹנֹתָ֔יו כִּ֚י בְּאֵימָ֣ה עֲלֵיהֶ֔ם מֵעַמֵּ֖י הָאֲרָצ֑וֹת 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because they were afraid of the people from other groups who lived around them, thinking they might attack them, they wanted to ask God for help and protection, so they made rebuilding the altar their first priority” or “Because they were afraid of the people from other groups who lived around them, thinking they might try to stop them from rebuilding the temple, they wanted to get started on rebuilding as quickly as possible, and so they began right away with the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EZR 3 3 t8y7 figs-explicit וַיָּכִ֤ינוּ הַמִּזְבֵּ֨חַ֙ עַל־מְכ֣וֹנֹתָ֔יו 1 they set the altar on its foundation This phrase likely means that the priests and leaders built this new altar right at the place where the altar had been located within the former temple. You could say that as an alternate translation if it would help make things clearer for your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 3 3 t8y7 figs-explicit וַיָּכִ֤ינוּ הַמִּזְבֵּ֨חַ֙ עַל־מְכ֣וֹנֹתָ֔יו 1 they set the altar on its foundation This phrase likely means that the priests and leaders built this new altar right at the place where the altar had been located within the former temple. You could say that as an alternate translation If it would be misunderstood in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 3 3 bk73 figs-explicit כִּ֚י בְּאֵימָ֣ה עֲלֵיהֶ֔ם מֵעַמֵּ֖י הָאֲרָצ֑וֹת 1 dread was on them The book does not say specifically why the Israelites were afraid of the people from other groups who lived around them. Two possibilities are that they were afraid these people might attack them or that they might try to keep them from rebuilding the temple, in both cases to stop them from re-establishing themselves in their former homeland. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could suggest one of these explanations explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they were afraid that the people from other groups who lived around them might attack them, they wanted to ask God for help and protection” or “because they were afraid that the people from other groups who lived around them might try to stop them from rebuilding the temple, they wanted to get started on rebuilding as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 3 3 n3m4 figs-metaphor בְּאֵימָ֣ה עֲלֵיהֶ֔ם 1 Here the book uses a spatial metaphor of **dread** or fear landing **on** or resting **on** the Israelites to express that the Israelites felt that emotion. Alternate translation: “they were very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 3 3 c33h figs-idiom מֵעַמֵּ֖י הָאֲרָצ֑וֹת 1 because of the people of the land This was the expression that the Jews used to refer to members of other people groups, including some that the Assyrians had brought into the area who were originally from other places (**lands**) but who were now living in and around the province of Judah. Alternate translation: “people from other groups” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ EZR 3 8 wwz8 translate-names זְרֻבָּבֶ֣ל בֶּן־שְׁ֠אַלְת
|
|||
EZR 3 8 fa38 translate-names וְיֵשׁ֨וּעַ בֶּן־יֽוֹצָדָ֜ק 1 Jeshua … Jozadak **Jeshua** is the name of a man, and **Jozadak** is the name of his father. See how you translated these names in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 3 8 bzi5 figs-metaphor וּשְׁאָ֥ר אֲחֵיהֶ֣ם ׀ הַכֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְהַלְוִיִּ֗ם 1 Here, **brothers** seems to be a figurative way of saying fellow leaders, since the priests and Levites were also leaders in the community like Zerubbabel, the governor, and Jeshua, the high priest. Alternate translation: “and their fellow leaders, the priests and Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 3 8 hy61 figs-abstractnouns וְכָל־הַבָּאִים֙ מֵהַשְּׁבִ֣י יְרֽוּשָׁלִַ֔ם 1 The abstract noun **captivity** refers to the way the Babylonians had transported many of the Jews away from their homeland when they conquered Jerusalem. (These included many of the parents or grandparents of the people here, but also some of these people themselves, as [3:12](../03/12.md) indicates.) If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the idea behind this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “and the rest of the people who had returned to Jerusalem from where their enemies had taken them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
EZR 3 8 uyam figs-ellipsis הֵחֵ֡לּוּ 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete because they were understood by the original readers. You can supply them from the context, if that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “began to build the new temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
EZR 3 8 uyam figs-ellipsis הֵחֵ֡לּוּ 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete because they were understood by the original readers. You can supply them from the context, If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “began to build the new temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
EZR 3 8 tliz grammar-connect-logic-goal וַיַּעֲמִ֣ידוּ 1 This phrase describes the purpose for which the Jewish leaders took the actions that the rest of the verse describes. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a term such as “so” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “so they appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
EZR 3 8 hf5n figs-idiom אֶת־הַלְוִיִּ֗ם מִבֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָמַ֔עְלָה 1 from twenty years old Here, **son of 20 years and above** is an idiom that indicates a person’s age. Alternate translation: “the Levites who were at least 20 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 3 8 vyhg figs-ellipsis לְנַצֵּ֖חַ עַל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת בֵּית־יְהוָֽה 1 In this context, **the work of the house** is an abbreviated way of referring to the project of constructing a temple. Alternate translation: “to supervise the construction of the temple for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ EZR 4 5 tq7w figs-explicit וְעַד־מַלְכ֖וּת דָּרְיָ֥ו
|
|||
EZR 4 5 py4b translate-names דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ 1 **Darius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 4 6 o931 writing-background וּבְמַלְכוּת֙ 1 The word **Now** indicates that the sentence it introduces will provide some background information. You can translate it with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
EZR 4 6 zxv3 figs-explicit וּבְמַלְכוּת֙ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בִּתְחִלַּ֖ת מַלְכוּת֑וֹ 1 Ahasuerus ruled the Persian Empire after Darius, who was his father. So here the book is presenting some events out of chronological order. That is, it is telling about some things that happened later, before finishing the story of what happened at this time. In [4:24](../04/24.md) the book will bring readers back to where it left off in [4:5](../04/05.md), and then, in [5:1](../05/01.md), it will describe how work on rebuilding the temple did resume under the reign of Darius. But first it gives accounts here of how the enemies of the Jews continued to oppose them under two later kings, Ahasuerus (described in this verse) and Artaxerxes (described in verses [7–23](../04/07.md)). The purpose may be to show that the Jews were wise to refuse the help that leaders from other nations offered, as described in [4:1–3](../04/01.md). Since those leaders were actually enemies of the Jews, as they demonstrated by opposing them under one king after another, their offer was not sincere and they could not be trusted. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact, they continued to oppose them under later kings. As soon as Ahasuerus succeeded his father Darius as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 4 6 k3fy translate-names אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 **Ahasuerus** is the name of a man. He is better known as Xerxes, so you could use that name for him in your translation if it would be clearer for your readers. Use the same name here that you use in the book of Esther. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 4 6 k3fy translate-names אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 **Ahasuerus** is the name of a man. He is better known as Xerxes, so you could use that name for him in your translation If it would be misunderstood in your language. Use the same name here that you use in the book of Esther. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 4 6 iaw6 figs-explicit כָּתְב֣וּ שִׂטְנָ֔ה עַל־יֹשְׁבֵ֥י יְהוּדָ֖ה וִירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 wrote an accusation against the inhabitants of Judah and Jerusalem If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what the enemies of the Jews accused them of doing. (The book provides the text of their letter in [4:11–16](../04/11.md), but it might be helpful to provide a summary in advance.) Alternate translation: “they wrote a letter in which they accused the Jews who had returned to Judah and Jerusalem of plotting to rebel against the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 4 6 z7sk figs-abstractnouns כָּתְב֣וּ שִׂטְנָ֔ה 1 The abstract noun **accusation** refers to what the enemies of the Jews said about them in the letter that they sent to the king. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “accuse” or “complain.” Alternate translation: “they wrote a letter to complain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
EZR 4 6 o4k9 figs-metonymy כָּתְב֣וּ שִׂטְנָ֔ה עַל 1 The noun **accusation** might be referring figuratively to the actual letter itself by substituting a description of the content of the letter. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a concrete term that explains the meaning of the figurative expression. Alternate translation: “they wrote a letter, accusing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ EZR 4 9 vvp8 translate-names רְח֣וּם בְּעֵל־טְעֵ֗ם 1 Erech
|
|||
EZR 4 9 shnl translate-names וְשִׁמְשַׁי֙ סָֽפְרָ֔א 1 **Shimshai** is is the name of a man and **the scribe** is his title. See how you translated them in [4:8](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Shimshai the state secretary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 4 9 d33e figs-idiom וּשְׁאָ֖ר כְּנָוָתְה֑וֹן דִּ֠ינָיֵא וַאֲפַרְסַתְכָיֵ֞א טַרְפְּלָיֵ֣א 1 As in [4:7](../04/07.md), the term **companions** here indicates people who hold a similar position. The other three terms describe the various positions that the other people held who joined in sending this letter. Alternate translation: “and their associates, who were judges, rulers, and officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 4 9 w9xp figs-123person וּשְׁאָ֖ר כְּנָוָתְה֑וֹן דִּ֠ינָיֵא וַאֲפַרְסַתְכָיֵ֞א טַרְפְּלָיֵ֣א 1 Rehum and Shimshai speak of themselves here in the third person by saying **their companions**. This was normal in their culture. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “and our colleagues, who are judges, rulers, and officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
EZR 4 9 ggq4 וַאֲפַרְסַתְכָיֵ֞א טַרְפְּלָיֵ֣א 1 The difference between these two terms is uncertain. If it is clearer in your language, you can combine them, as in the UST.<br>
|
||||
EZR 4 9 ggq4 וַאֲפַרְסַתְכָיֵ֞א טַרְפְּלָיֵ֣א 1 The difference between these two terms is uncertain. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can combine them, as in the UST.<br>
|
||||
EZR 4 9 t8pa translate-names אֲפָֽרְסָיֵ֗א אַרְכְּוָיֵ֤א בָבְלָיֵא֙ שֽׁוּשַׁנְכָיֵ֔א דהוא עֵלְמָיֵֽא 1 These are the names of four people groups and an alternate name by which the last group was known. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 4 9 yz8m figs-explicit אֲפָֽרְסָיֵ֗א אַרְכְּוָיֵ֤א בָבְלָיֵא֙ שֽׁוּשַׁנְכָיֵ֔א דהוא עֵלְמָיֵֽא 1 These are apparently the people groups that the officials who wrote the letter belonged to. The writers seem to feel that they can speak on behalf of their entire people groups because they would agree with the concerns that they are expressing about the Jews. You could say this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “on behalf of the Persians, Erechites, Babylonians, and Susaites (that is, Elamites)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 4 10 k64z וּשְׁאָ֣ר אֻמַּיָּ֗א דִּ֤י הַגְלִי֙ אָסְנַפַּר֙ רַבָּ֣א וְיַקִּירָ֔א וְהוֹתֵ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּקִרְיָ֖ה דִּ֣י שָׁמְרָ֑יִן וּשְׁאָ֥ר עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֖ה 1 This could mean one of two things. (1) It could be referring to two different sets of people groups: (a) **the rest of the nations**, which would be some further groups that, like the four listed in [4:9](../04/09.md), Ashurbanipal exiled to the region of Samaria, and (b) **the rest of Beyond-the-River**, which would be all the other groups that were then living in the province of Beyond-the-River, however they came to live there. This is the reading of ULT. or (2) It could be referring to one set of people groups made up of all the other groups that, like the four listed in [4:9](../04/09.md), Ashurbanipal moved to this area and resettled in the cities of Samaria and in other parts of the province. This is the reading of UST. Either way, the officials writing this letter feel that they can speak on behalf of those other groups in addition to the groups that they belong to personally.
|
||||
|
|
@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ EZR 4 21 ie6i figs-explicit שִׂ֣ימוּ טְּעֵ֔ם לְבַטָּל
|
|||
EZR 4 21 emg2 grammar-connect-logic-goal וְקִרְיְתָ֥א דָךְ֙ לָ֣א תִתְבְּנֵ֔א עַד־מִנִּ֖י טַעְמָ֥א יִתְּשָֽׂם 1 give a command The phrase **so that** indicates that the clause that follows describes the purpose for which Artaxerxes wants the officials to issue a decree. It is to make the Jews stop working on the walls and houses. He does not want there to be any rebuilding in Jerusalem unless he authorizes it personally. Alternate translation: “because I want this decree to prevent all rebuilding unless I issue a decree permitting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
EZR 4 22 xxy6 figs-litotes וּזְהִירִ֥ין הֱו֛וֹ שָׁל֖וּ לְמֶעְבַּ֣ד עַל־דְּנָ֑ה 1 Be careful not to neglect This means “Be sure to act concerning this.” This is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using two negative expressions: **be careful of**, that is, “avoid,” together with an expression that is the opposite of what is desired: **negligence of action**. Artaxerxes wants the officials to take action. Alternate translation: “Be sure to take action in response to this situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||||
EZR 4 22 snhn figs-explicit לְמָה֙ יִשְׂגֵּ֣א חֲבָלָ֔א לְהַנְזָקַ֖ת מַלְכִֽין 1 Why should this damage increase, to the hurt of the kings? The implication is that if the Jews were able to rebuild and fortify Jerusalem and they revolted, then the interests of the king would be damaged because he would lose honor, as the officials suggest in their letter ([4:14](../04/14.md)), and he would also lose revenue ([4:13](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Why should I and other kings suffer dishonor or lose tribute money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 4 22 t7e7 figs-rquestion לְמָה֙ יִשְׂגֵּ֣א חֲבָלָ֔א לְהַנְזָקַ֖ת מַלְכִֽין 1 Why should this damage increase, to the hurt of the kings? Artaxerxes is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect the Samaritan officials to tell him why he should experience greater damage. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for the officials to get the Jews to stop rebuilding Jerusalem. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I should not suffer dishonor or lose tribute money.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 4 22 t7e7 figs-rquestion לְמָה֙ יִשְׂגֵּ֣א חֲבָלָ֔א לְהַנְזָקַ֖ת מַלְכִֽין 1 Why should this damage increase, to the hurt of the kings? Artaxerxes is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect the Samaritan officials to tell him why he should experience greater damage. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for the officials to get the Jews to stop rebuilding Jerusalem. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I should not suffer dishonor or lose tribute money.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 4 22 kqp4 figs-123person לְמָה֙ יִשְׂגֵּ֣א חֲבָלָ֔א לְהַנְזָקַ֖ת מַלְכִֽין 1 this damage increase As in [4:13](../04/13.md), the plural **kings** here may envision that not just Artaxerxes but also his successors would lose revenue if Jerusalem leads a revolt that spreads throughout Beyond-the-River, as the Samaritan officials suggest it would. But Artaxerxes is speaking primarily of himself, in the third person, as kings sometimes did, just as their subjects addressed them in the third person to show humility and respect. (Compare, for example, the way Cyrus speaks of himself in the third person in [6:4](../06/04.md), and Darius speaks of himself that way in [6:8](../06/08.md) and [6:10](../06/10.md)). Alternate translation: “Why should kings suffer dishonor or lose tribute money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
EZR 4 23 nhx0 grammar-connect-time-sequential אֱדַ֗יִן 1 the copy of the letter from King Artaxerxes was read The word **Then** indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the events it has just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
EZR 4 23 zq2h figs-explicit מִן־דִּ֞י פַּרְשֶׁ֤גֶן נִשְׁתְּוָנָא֙ דִּ֚י ארתחששתא מַלְכָּ֔א קֱרִ֧י קֳדָם־רְח֛וּם וְשִׁמְשַׁ֥י סָפְרָ֖א וּכְנָוָתְה֑וֹן 1 the copy of the letter from King Artaxerxes was read The implication is that a messenger brought a copy of the letter from King Artaxerxes to these officials and read it aloud to them. (See the note to [4:18](../04/18.md) for background to the practice of reading correspondence out loud.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as soon as messengers from King Artaxerxes brought a copy of his letter to Rehum, Shimshai the state secretary, and their associates, and read it aloud to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ EZR 5 8 cgiz figs-activepassive וַעֲבִ֥ידְתָּא דָ֛ךְ א
|
|||
EZR 5 8 nzzw figs-metaphor וּמַצְלַ֥ח בְּיֶדְהֹֽם 1 timbers Here, **hand** figuratively represents control and action. Alternate translation: “and it is succeeding at their initiative” or “and they have been able to advance the work successfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 5 9 uee9 figs-quotemarks מַן־שָׂ֨ם לְכֹ֜ם טְעֵ֗ם בַּיְתָ֤א דְנָה֙ לְמִבְנְיָ֔ה וְאֻשַּׁרְנָ֥א דְנָ֖ה לְשַׁכְלָלָֽה 1 Who issued you a command This is a quotation within a quotation. That is, the book is quoting from the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius, and within that letter, they are quoting what they asked the Jewish elders. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off these words within secondary quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
EZR 5 9 p8jz figs-parallelism מַן־שָׂ֨ם לְכֹ֜ם טְעֵ֗ם בַּיְתָ֤א דְנָה֙ לְמִבְנְיָ֔ה וְאֻשַּׁרְנָ֥א דְנָ֖ה לְשַׁכְלָלָֽה 1 Who issued you a command See how you translated this question in [5:3](../05/03.md). The phrases **build this house** and **complete this structure** refer to the same action, not different actions. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. If that would be confusing for your readers, you can say it once and provide emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “Who said that you could build a large temple such as this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
EZR 5 10 okji grammar-connect-logic-result וְאַ֧ף שְׁמָהָתְהֹ֛ם שְׁאֵ֥לְנָא לְּהֹ֖ם לְהוֹדָעוּתָ֑ךְ דִּ֛י נִכְתֻּ֥ב שֻׁם־גֻּבְרַיָּ֖א דִּ֥י בְרָאשֵׁיהֹֽם 1 Who issued you a command If it is clearer in your language, you could put the reason before the result. (We do not know if Tattenai and his associates succeeded in writing down the list of names.) Alternate translation: “We wanted to write down the names of their leaders and to be prepared to let you know who they were, so we also asked them their names” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EZR 5 10 okji grammar-connect-logic-result וְאַ֧ף שְׁמָהָתְהֹ֛ם שְׁאֵ֥לְנָא לְּהֹ֖ם לְהוֹדָעוּתָ֑ךְ דִּ֛י נִכְתֻּ֥ב שֻׁם־גֻּבְרַיָּ֖א דִּ֥י בְרָאשֵׁיהֹֽם 1 Who issued you a command If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put the reason before the result. (We do not know if Tattenai and his associates succeeded in writing down the list of names.) Alternate translation: “We wanted to write down the names of their leaders and to be prepared to let you know who they were, so we also asked them their names” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EZR 5 10 qn28 figs-metaphor גֻּבְרַיָּ֖א דִּ֥י בְרָאשֵׁיהֹֽם 1 Who issued you a command Here, **head** is a figurative way of referring to a leader. Alternate translation: “the men who were their leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 5 11 f9fm figs-quotemarks אֲנַ֣חְנָא הִמּ֡וֹ עַבְדוֹהִי֩ דִֽי־אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜א וְאַרְעָ֗א 1 General Information: Starting here, and through [5:16](../05/16.md), there is another quotation within a quotation. The book is quoting from the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius, and within that letter, they are quoting what the Jewish elders told them in response to their question. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
EZR 5 11 m5y2 figs-idiom אֲנַ֣חְנָא הִמּ֡וֹ עַבְדוֹהִי֩ דִֽי־אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜א וְאַרְעָ֗א 1 We are servants of the God The Jewish leaders describe themselves as **servants** of God because they are speaking of a superior with humility and respect. However, in this context, the expression is also an idiom that indicates that this is the God whom they worship. Alternate translation: “We worship the God who created heaven and earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ EZR 7 13 d9b4 figs-activepassive מִנִּי֮ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵם֒ ד
|
|||
EZR 7 13 wi2u figs-you עִמָּ֖ךְ 1 may go with you The king is addressing Ezra, so **you** is singular and refers to Ezra here, and **you** and **your** similarly refer to him in all of their other occurrences through [7:20](../07/20.md). If your language distinguishes between forms of you, the form for a superior addressing a respected individual would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||||
EZR 7 13 g0ml מִן־עַמָּ֨ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 may go with you Here Artaxerxes specifies that **Israel** is the name of Ezra’s people group, perhaps because he does not expect everyone who sees this letter to be familiar with them already. Alternate translation: “from the people known as ‘Israel’” or<br>“from your people who are called ‘Israel’”
|
||||
EZR 7 14 ahgx grammar-connect-logic-result כָּל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩ מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜א וְשִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ לְבַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְלִֽירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּדָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖ךְ דִּ֥י בִידָֽךְ 1 Connecting Statement: Verses [7:14–17](../07/14.md) are one long sentence in Aramaic. The first part ([7:14–16](../07/14.md)) provides the reasons for the second part (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could break up that sentence into several smaller sentences. To begin with, you could make this verse a sentence of its own. To do that, you can leave off the word **Because** and express the meaning later in verse 17 with a word such as “so” or “therefore.” Alternate translation: “The king and his seven counselors are sending you to inquire about Judah and about Jerusalem by the law of your God which is in your hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EZR 7 14 cbf2 grammar-connect-logic-result כָּל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩ 1 Connecting Statement: The word **Because** indicates that in the long sentence that follows, the next several phrases ([7:14–16](../07/14.md)) will provide the reasons for what the final two phrases say (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If you have decided to keep the long sentence, you can translate this first word with the word or phrase in your language that introduces a reason. However, also consider breaking up this long sentence if that would make things clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “Since” or “In view of the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EZR 7 14 cbf2 grammar-connect-logic-result כָּל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩ 1 Connecting Statement: The word **Because** indicates that in the long sentence that follows, the next several phrases ([7:14–16](../07/14.md)) will provide the reasons for what the final two phrases say (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If you have decided to keep the long sentence, you can translate this first word with the word or phrase in your language that introduces a reason. However, also consider breaking up this long sentence If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “Since” or “In view of the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EZR 7 14 h7cx figs-activepassive מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜א וְשִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ 1 the king, and his seven counselors If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EZR 7 14 cx02 figs-123person מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜א וְשִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ 1 the king, and his seven counselors Artaxerxes speaks of himself here in the third person. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
EZR 7 14 tpvw figs-metaphor מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜א וְשִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ 1 the king, and his seven counselors This could mean literally that Ezra has been in the king’s presence, that is, in his court, and that the king is sending him out from there. This phrase would show anyone who read the letter that Ezra was an important figure in the royal court. The phrase could also be a spatial metaphor indicating that Ezra is going out on the king’s behalf and with his authority. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you from my court” or “I and my seven counselors are<br>sending you with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -834,13 +834,13 @@ EZR 7 22 pdtm figs-idiom וּמְלַ֖ח דִּי־לָ֥א כְתָֽב 1 o
|
|||
EZR 7 23 hz1d figs-activepassive כָּל־דִּ֗י מִן־טַ֨עַם֙ אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔א יִתְעֲבֵד֙ אַדְרַזְדָּ֔א לְבֵ֖ית אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֑א 1 one hundred baths of oil If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “I want you to make sure that the Jewish leaders have the funds they need to do everything that the God who rules in heaven has commanded regarding worship in his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 ado8 figs-metaphor כָּל־דִּ֗י מִן־טַ֨עַם֙ אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔א 1 one hundred baths of oil Here, by **decree,** Artaxerxes is likely referring to what he calls the law of the God of heaven in [7:12](../07/12.md). He means the law of Moses, and specifically the commandments in the law for how community worship was to be conducted. Artaxerxes speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a royal decree that God had issued. Alternate translation: “Everything that the God who rules in heaven has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 t2e7 figs-metaphor לְבֵ֖ית אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֑א 1 the house See how you translated the expressions **the house of God** in [1:4](../01/04.md) and **the God of heaven** in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “for the temple of the God who rules in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 i89i figs-rquestion דִּֽי־לְמָ֤ה לֶֽהֱוֵא֙ קְצַ֔ף עַל־מַלְכ֥וּת מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 For why should his wrath come upon the kingdom of me and my sons? The king is making a statement, not asking a real question. He does not expect the treasurers to explain to him why there should be wrath against the kingdom. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for the treasurers to ensure that sufficient funds are provided so that worship in the temple can be conducted just as God has commanded, so that God will not be angry. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Because I do not want God to be angry with me or with any of my descendants who rule after me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 i89i figs-rquestion דִּֽי־לְמָ֤ה לֶֽהֱוֵא֙ קְצַ֔ף עַל־מַלְכ֥וּת מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 For why should his wrath come upon the kingdom of me and my sons? The king is making a statement, not asking a real question. He does not expect the treasurers to explain to him why there should be wrath against the kingdom. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for the treasurers to ensure that sufficient funds are provided so that worship in the temple can be conducted just as God has commanded, so that God will not be angry. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Because I do not want God to be angry with me or with any of my descendants who rule after me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 bc0q figs-explicit דִּֽי־לְמָ֤ה לֶֽהֱוֵא֙ קְצַ֔ף עַל־מַלְכ֥וּת מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 For why should his wrath come upon the kingdom of me and my sons? The implication is that Artaxerxes wants to have God’s favor, and he is concerned that God will be displeased with him instead if he does not provide for God’s temple in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not want God to be angry with me or with any of my descendants who rule after me because I neglected his temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 x6h5 figs-metonymy דִּֽי־לְמָ֤ה לֶֽהֱוֵא֙ קְצַ֔ף עַל־מַלְכ֥וּת מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 For why should his wrath come upon the kingdom of me and my sons God’s wrath represents God’s punishment. Alternate translation: “I do not want God to punish me or any of my descendants who rule after me because I neglected his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 jptx figs-metonymy מַלְכ֥וּת מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 For why should his wrath come upon the kingdom of me and my sons God would not actually be angry with the realm over which Artaxerxes has authority. Rather, he uses the term **kingdom** to describe himself and his descendants figuratively by reference to something associated with them. Alternate translation: “me or any of my descendants who rule after me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 aia6 figs-123person מַלְכ֥וּת מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 For why should his wrath come upon the kingdom of me and my sons Artaxerxes speaks of himself here in the third person. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “my kingdom and that of my descendants who rule after me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
EZR 7 23 wo5t figs-metaphor וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 For why should his wrath come upon the kingdom of me and my sons This could possibly mean the biological sons of King Artaxerxes, but since he speaks of the kingdom as belonging to them, it is more likely that this is a figurative reference to his descendants, and specifically the line of direct descendants who would rule Persia as his successors (his son, his grandson, etc.). (If it would be helpful, also review the notes to [4:15](../04/15.md) and [6:10](../06/10.md) about how Persian kings considered their predecessors their “fathers” and their successors their **sons**.) Alternate translation: “and my descendants who rule after me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 7 24 k1d1 figs-activepassive וּלְכֹ֣ם מְהוֹדְעִ֗ין 1 We also make known to you that it is not lawful to impose tax, tribute, or custom If it is clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “I am also declaring to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EZR 7 24 k1d1 figs-activepassive וּלְכֹ֣ם מְהוֹדְעִ֗ין 1 We also make known to you that it is not lawful to impose tax, tribute, or custom If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “I am also declaring to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EZR 7 24 kw6q grammar-connect-logic-result כָל־כָּהֲנַיָּ֣א וְ֠לֵוָיֵא זַמָּ֨רַיָּ֤א תָרָֽעַיָּא֙ נְתִ֣ינַיָּ֔א וּפָ֣לְחֵ֔י בֵּ֖ית אֱלָהָ֣א דְנָ֑ה מִנְדָּ֤ה בְלוֹ֙ וַהֲלָ֔ךְ לָ֥א שַׁלִּ֖יט לְמִרְמֵ֥א עֲלֵיהֹֽם 1 We also make known to you that it is not lawful to impose tax, tribute, or custom The last phrase, **the servants of that house of God**, describes what the people in the five groups listed all have in common. They all work in the temple of God. In this way, the phrase gives the reason why the treasurers may not impose taxes on anyone in any of these groups. Likely as a further way of supporting the temple, and perhaps also as a gesture of respect for God, Artaxerxes is providing an exemption from taxes for all temple personnel. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this reason before the results that the rest of the sentence describes. Alternate translation: “because the priests, Levites, singers, gatekeepers, and temple servants all work in the temple of this God, you have no authority to set any tax, tribute, or custom upon them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EZR 7 24 wx23 מִנְדָּ֤ה בְלוֹ֙ וַהֲלָ֔ךְ 1 We also make known to you that it is not lawful to impose tax, tribute, or custom See how you translated this phrase in [4:13](../04/13.md).
|
||||
EZR 7 24 mgkt translate-names וְ֠לֵוָיֵא 1 We also make known to you that it is not lawful to impose tax, tribute, or custom See how you translated this term in [2:40](../02/40.md). Review the explanation in the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ EZR 8 13 rzr8 figs-explicit וּמִבְּנֵ֣י אֲדֹנִיקָם֮
|
|||
EZR 8 13 k1ic translate-names אֲדֹנִיקָם֮…אֱלִיפֶ֖לֶט יְעִיאֵ֣ל וּֽשְׁמַעְיָ֑ה 1 Adonikam These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 8 13 hu49 figs-explicit וְעִמָּהֶ֖ם שִׁשִּׁ֥ים הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 sixty See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 60 men from their clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 8 14 p7ej figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֥י בִגְוַ֖י עוּתַ֣י וְזַכּ֑וּר 1 Bigvai **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bigvai, Uthai and Zaccur” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 8 14 we81 figs-explicit וְעִמּ֖וֹ שִׁבְעִ֥ים הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 seventy See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Here, **him** actually refers to both Uthai and Zaccur, so you can use a plural pronoun in your translation if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “along with 70 men from their clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 8 14 we81 figs-explicit וְעִמּ֖וֹ שִׁבְעִ֥ים הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 seventy See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Here, **him** actually refers to both Uthai and Zaccur, so you can use a plural pronoun in your translation If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “along with 70 men from their clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 8 15 zfwz figs-explicit וָֽאֶקְבְּצֵ֗ם אֶל־הַנָּהָר֙ הַבָּ֣א אֶֽל־אַהֲוָ֔א וַנַּחֲנֶ֥ה שָׁ֖ם יָמִ֣ים שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה 1 General Information: **Them** means everyone listed in [8:2–14](../08/02.md), everyone who would be traveling with Ezra. The implication is that they all packed for the trip and set out from their homes, but then assembled at a location outside of the city of Babylon where Ezra could make sure the group was ready for the trip. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I had everyone who was going to be traveling with me assemble on the banks of the river that flows from Babylon to Ahava. We camped there for three days so that I could make sure that we had enough temple personnel with us and that we could transport the gold and silver safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 8 15 gl34 translate-names הַנָּהָר֙ הַבָּ֣א אֶֽל־אַהֲוָ֔א 1 the river that flows to Ahava The exact location of this river on whose banks the group assembled can no longer be identified. In [8:21](../08/21.md) and [8:31](../08/31.md), Ezra calls it the Ahava River, and you could use that same name here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the Ahava River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EZR 8 15 uqev figs-exclusive וַנַּחֲנֶ֥ה 1 the river that flows to Ahava As Ezra tells his story, he uses **we** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@ EZR 9 9 kdnc figs-parallelism לְרוֹמֵ֞ם אֶת־בֵּ֤ית אֱל
|
|||
EZR 9 9 mpbv figs-metaphor לְרוֹמֵ֞ם 1 in the sight of the king of Persia **To raise up** is a figurative expression for building it. Alternate translation: “to rebuild” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 9 9 f833 figs-metaphor וּלְהַעֲמִ֣יד אֶת־חָרְבֹתָ֔יו 1 the house of our God Like **raise up**, **cause … to stand** is a figurative expression for building. Alternate translation: “by repairing its ruins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 9 9 b5aw figs-metaphor וְלָֽתֶת־לָ֣נוּ גָדֵ֔ר בִּֽיהוּדָ֖ה וּבִירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 to give us a wall Ezra is not referring to a literal wall. (The walls of Jerusalem were still broken down at this time. They would not be repaired until Nehemiah came to the city over a dozen years later.) Rather, he means figuratively that the Persian kings authorized the returned exiles to re-establish their community in Judah and Jerusalem, and so the king would protect their right to live there. It is as if the Jews are already protected by this as though by a wall. Alternate translation: “and has given us a safe place to live in Judah and Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 9 10 a9fk figs-rquestion וְעַתָּ֛ה מַה־נֹּאמַ֥ר אֱלֹהֵ֖ינוּ אַֽחֲרֵי־זֹ֑את 1 to give us a wall Ezra is making a statement, not really asking a question. He does not expect God to tell him what excuses he can give for the disobedience of the Israelites. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Israelites really have no excuses. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “So now, our God, we really have no excuses, after all of this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 9 10 a9fk figs-rquestion וְעַתָּ֛ה מַה־נֹּאמַ֥ר אֱלֹהֵ֖ינוּ אַֽחֲרֵי־זֹ֑את 1 to give us a wall Ezra is making a statement, not really asking a question. He does not expect God to tell him what excuses he can give for the disobedience of the Israelites. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Israelites really have no excuses. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “So now, our God, we really have no excuses, after all of this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 9 10 olme figs-explicit אַֽחֲרֵי־זֹ֑את 1 to give us a wall If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could explain what **this** refers to. There are two possibilities. (1) It probably refers to all of the sinning that the Jews did by disobeying God. Alternate translation: “after we have continued to sin against you” or (2) It could refer to the good things that God did for the Jews even though they continually disobeyed him. Alternate translation: “after you have been much more kind to us than we deserved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 9 10 akg2 figs-metaphor עָזַ֖בְנוּ מִצְוֺתֶֽיךָ 1 to give us a wall As in [8:22](../08/22.md), forsaking or abandoning God is a metaphor for disobeying him or refusing to serve him. Alternate translation: “we have disobeyed your commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 9 11 v7am figs-metaphor אֲשֶׁ֣ר צִוִּ֗יתָ בְּיַ֨ד עֲבָדֶ֣יךָ הַנְּבִיאִים֮ 1 to give us a wall Here, **hand** figuratively represents control and action. This expression means that God gave these commandments by having the prophets speak them to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “which you told your servants, the prophets, to speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1147,13 +1147,13 @@ EZR 9 12 qz7f figs-yousingular לְמַ֣עַן תֶּחֶזְק֗וּ 1 to give
|
|||
EZR 9 12 r9c0 figs-idiom וְהוֹרַשְׁתֶּ֥ם לִבְנֵיכֶ֖ם עַד־עוֹלָֽם 1 to give us a wall As earlier in the sentence, **until eternity** means “for as long as anyone can anticipate into the future.” Alternate translation: “so that your descendants will always be able to live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 9 12 s1e8 figs-metaphor לִבְנֵיכֶ֖ם 1 to give us a wall Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “your descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EZR 9 12 uax9 figs-quotemarks עַד־עוֹלָֽם 1 forever After this phrase Ezra ends his quotation of what Yahweh commanded through the prophets. If you decided in [9:11](../09/11.md) to mark their words as a secondary quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
EZR 9 13 qmrs figs-explicit כָּל־הַבָּ֣א עָלֵ֔ינוּ 1 forever The phrase **all that has come upon us** refers to the punishments that Ezra mentioned in [verse 7](../09/07.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could make that information explicit. Alternate translation: “all of the things with which you punished us” or “everything that you allowed to happen to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 9 13 qmrs figs-explicit כָּל־הַבָּ֣א עָלֵ֔ינוּ 1 forever The phrase **all that has come upon us** refers to the punishments that Ezra mentioned in [verse 7](../09/07.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could make that information explicit. Alternate translation: “all of the things with which you punished us” or “everything that you allowed to happen to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 9 13 am2g figs-parallelism בְּמַעֲשֵׂ֨ינוּ֙ הָרָעִ֔ים וּבְאַשְׁמָתֵ֖נוּ הַגְּדֹלָ֑ה 1 forever These two phrases mean similar things. Ezra uses the repetition for emphasis. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “since we are so guilty because of the wrong things that we have done” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Alternate translation: “since we have committed such great sins, and since we are so guilty as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
EZR 9 13 hd7r figs-idiom חָשַׂ֤כְתָּֽ לְמַ֨טָּה֙ מֵֽעֲוֺנֵ֔נוּ 1 forever This is a Hebrew idiom. Alternate translation: “have not punished us as fully as our sins deserve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 9 13 w379 figs-explicit וְנָתַ֥תָּה לָּ֛נוּ פְּלֵיטָ֖ה כָּזֹֽאת 1 forever Ezra is referring implicitly to himself and to the other Jews who have returned from exile. Alternate translation: “and you have allowed some of us to return to our homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EZR 9 14 jh1x figs-rquestion הֲנָשׁוּב֙ לְהָפֵ֣ר מִצְוֺתֶ֔יךָ וּ֨לְהִתְחַתֵּ֔ן בְּעַמֵּ֥י הַתֹּעֵב֖וֹת הָאֵ֑לֶּה 1 should we again break your commandments and intermarry with the people of these abominations? Ezra is making a statement, not really asking a question. He does not expect God to tell him whether the people should once again disobey. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for them to stop intermarrying with the other people groups. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “we certainly should not break your commandments again by intermarrying with peoples who do things that you cannot stand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 9 14 jh1x figs-rquestion הֲנָשׁוּב֙ לְהָפֵ֣ר מִצְוֺתֶ֔יךָ וּ֨לְהִתְחַתֵּ֔ן בְּעַמֵּ֥י הַתֹּעֵב֖וֹת הָאֵ֑לֶּה 1 should we again break your commandments and intermarry with the people of these abominations? Ezra is making a statement, not really asking a question. He does not expect God to tell him whether the people should once again disobey. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for them to stop intermarrying with the other people groups. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “we certainly should not break your commandments again by intermarrying with peoples who do things that you cannot stand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 9 14 pm7m figs-idiom בְּעַמֵּ֥י הַתֹּעֵב֖וֹת הָאֵ֑לֶּה 1 should we again break your commandments and intermarry with the people of these abominations? As in [9:1](../09/01.md) and [9:11](../09/11.md), the term **abominations** refers to things that God cannot allow to have in his presence. Alternate translation: “with the people groups who do these things that God detests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 9 14 mn62 figs-rquestion הֲל֤וֹא תֶֽאֱנַף־בָּ֨נוּ֙ עַד־כַּלֵּ֔ה לְאֵ֥ין שְׁאֵרִ֖ית וּפְלֵיטָֽה 1 Would you not be angry … no remnant or survivor? Once again Ezra is making a statement, not really asking a question. He does not expect God to tell him whether he would be angry with the Jews. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how angry God would become. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “If we did that, you would be totally angry with us, and you would not leave any of us alive.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 9 14 mn62 figs-rquestion הֲל֤וֹא תֶֽאֱנַף־בָּ֨נוּ֙ עַד־כַּלֵּ֔ה לְאֵ֥ין שְׁאֵרִ֖ית וּפְלֵיטָֽה 1 Would you not be angry … no remnant or survivor? Once again Ezra is making a statement, not really asking a question. He does not expect God to tell him whether he would be angry with the Jews. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how angry God would become. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “If we did that, you would be totally angry with us, and you would not leave any of us alive.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EZR 9 14 tlu0 figs-idiom הֲל֤וֹא תֶֽאֱנַף־בָּ֨נוּ֙ עַד־כַּלֵּ֔ה 1 Would you not be angry … no remnant or survivor? This is a Hebrew idiom. Alternate translation: “Would you not be totally angry with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EZR 9 14 ulm6 figs-doublet לְאֵ֥ין שְׁאֵרִ֖ית וּפְלֵיטָֽה 1 Would you not be angry … no remnant or survivor? In this specific context, the terms **remnant** and **escape** mean the same thing. Ezra uses the terms together for emphasis. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “you would not leave any of us alive.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
EZR 9 15 qhg9 grammar-connect-logic-result יְהוָ֞ה אֱלֹהֵ֤י יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ צַדִּ֣יק אַ֔תָּה כִּֽי־נִשְׁאַ֥רְנוּ פְלֵיטָ֖ה כְּהַיּ֣וֹם הַזֶּ֑ה 1 Look If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for what the first phrase says. Alternate translation: “But you have ensured that a group of us would survive, just as we are right now, so we acknowledge that you, Yahweh, the God of Israel, are righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
138
en_tn_16-NEH.tsv
138
en_tn_16-NEH.tsv
|
|
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ NEH 1 3 ab15 figs-doublet בְּרָעָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּבְ
|
|||
NEH 1 3 ab17 figs-abstractnouns בְּרָעָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּבְחֶרְפָּ֑ה 1 in great evil The abstract noun **difficulty** refers to a situation that is very hard for the people to live in. It describes a situation that is dangerous and insecure for the people in it. You can translate this idea with an adjective such as “bad.” Alternate translation: “in a very bad situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 1 3 ab19 figs-abstractnouns וּבְחֶרְפָּ֑ה 1 and in reproach **Reproach** is an abstract noun that describes how other people would see the situation of the Jews. The situation would lead them to say bad things about them. You can translate this idea with a verb such as “mock.” Alternate translation: “and people are mocking them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 1 3 pk3f figs-activepassive וְחוֹמַ֤ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ מְפֹרָ֔צֶת וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ נִצְּת֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 the wall of Jerusalem is broken down, and its gates have been burned with fire You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “armies have broken open the wall of Jerusalem and have set its gates on fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 1 3 ab21 figs-explicit וְחוֹמַ֤ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ מְפֹרָ֔צֶת וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ נִצְּת֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 the wall of Jerusalem is broken down, and its gates have been burned with fire The implication is that the people are now defenseless. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people living there have no protection.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 3 ab21 figs-explicit וְחוֹמַ֤ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ מְפֹרָ֔צֶת וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ נִצְּת֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 the wall of Jerusalem is broken down, and its gates have been burned with fire The implication is that the people are now defenseless. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people living there have no protection.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 3 ab23 נִצְּת֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 burned with fire If saying that something is burned **with fire** is redundant in your language, you can just say, **completely burned**. Alternate translation: “burned down”
|
||||
NEH 1 4 ab25 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֞י 1 And it happened that Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next episode in his story. You do not need to represent it this way in your translation, but use a natural way to introduce a new episode in the story. Alternate translation: “So the next thing I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
NEH 1 4 ab27 figs-metonymy כְּשָׁמְעִ֣י ׀ אֶת־הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֗לֶּה 1 as soon as I heard these words Here **words** refers to the things that were described by the words. Alternate translation: “after hearing about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ NEH 1 6 bxj6 figs-metonymy וַאֲנִ֥י וּבֵית־אָבִ֖י
|
|||
NEH 1 7 ab65 figs-parallelism חֲבֹ֖ל חָבַ֣לְנוּ לָ֑ךְ 1 With extreme corruption we have acted corruptly against you The repetition here is used for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. You can combine them into one phrase, with a word like **very** to convey emphasis. Alternate translation: “We have acted very corruptly toward you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 1 7 ryci figs-abstractnouns חֲבֹ֖ל חָבַ֣לְנוּ לָ֑ךְ 1 With extreme corruption we have acted corruptly against you You can translate the idea of the abstract noun **corruption** with a verb such as **sinned.** Alternate translation: “We have sinned very much against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 1 7 ab67 figs-doublet אֶת־הַמִּצְוֺ֗ת וְאֶת־הַֽחֻקִּים֙ וְאֶת־הַמִּשְׁפָּטִ֔ים 1 the commandments, and the statutes, and the judgments These three words mean basically the same thing. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how comprehensively the Israelites have disobeyed what God commanded them through Moses. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” otherwise “the commands and rules and laws” (Note: A doublet can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 1 7 brz7 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוִּ֖יתָ אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה עַבְדֶּֽךָ 1 that you commanded Moses, your servant Moses was the great leader who brought the Israelites out of slavery in Egypt centuries before and gave them God’s law. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that you gave us many years ago through your servant Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 7 brz7 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוִּ֖יתָ אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה עַבְדֶּֽךָ 1 that you commanded Moses, your servant Moses was the great leader who brought the Israelites out of slavery in Egypt centuries before and gave them God’s law. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that you gave us many years ago through your servant Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 8 pv64 figs-idiom זְכָר־נָא֙ 1 Please remember Here **remember** is an idiom that means to think about someone and consider what action you can take on their behalf. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten the promise he made to Moses. Alternate translation: “Please think about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 1 8 y5jp figs-yousingular הַדָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוִּ֛יתָ אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה עַבְדְּךָ֖ 1 the word that you commanded Moses, your servant The pronouns **you** and **your** refer to God and so are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||||
NEH 1 8 ab69 הַדָּבָ֔ר 1 the word This refers to a promise that God made while giving the law to the people of Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “the promise”
|
||||
NEH 1 8 b6qh figs-you אַתֶּ֣ם תִּמְעָ֔לוּ 1 If you yourselves act unfaithfully The pronouns **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Israelite people, and so they are plural. Alternate translation: “If you Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||||
NEH 1 8 ab71 figs-metaphor אַתֶּ֣ם תִּמְעָ֔לוּ 1 If you yourselves act unfaithfully Here infidelity in marriage is used as a figurative description of the people of Israel not keeping God’s commandments. Alternate translation: “If you Israelites do not keep my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 1 8 evf5 figs-explicit אָפִ֥יץ אֶתְכֶ֖ם בָּעַמִּֽים 1 I myself will scatter you among the peoples The implication is that God would do this to punish the Israelites for breaking his commandments. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a punishment, I will take you from your land and make you live among the other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 8 evf5 figs-explicit אָפִ֥יץ אֶתְכֶ֖ם בָּעַמִּֽים 1 I myself will scatter you among the peoples The implication is that God would do this to punish the Israelites for breaking his commandments. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a punishment, I will take you from your land and make you live among the other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 9 dqn5 figs-you וְשַׁבְתֶּ֣ם אֵלַ֔י וּשְׁמַרְתֶּם֙ מִצְוֺתַ֔י וַעֲשִׂיתֶ֖ם אֹתָ֑ם אִם־יִהְיֶ֨ה נִֽדַּחֲכֶ֜ם 1 But if you return to me and keep my commandments and do them, although your banished ones are The pronouns **you** and **your** refer to the Israelite people, so they are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||||
NEH 1 9 ab75 figs-metaphor וְשַׁבְתֶּ֣ם אֵלַ֔י וּשְׁמַרְתֶּם֙ מִצְוֺתַ֔י וַעֲשִׂיתֶ֖ם אֹתָ֑ם אִם־יִהְיֶ֨ה נִֽדַּחֲכֶ֜ם 1 But if you return to me **Return** is a figurative way of saying “become loyal again.” Alternate translation: “If you become loyal to me again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 1 9 ab77 figs-parallelism וּשְׁמַרְתֶּם֙ מִצְוֺתַ֔י וַעֲשִׂיתֶ֖ם אֹתָ֑ם 1 and keep my commandments and do them These two statements mean similar things. They are used together for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “start obeying my commandments once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ NEH 1 9 ab85 figs-personification אֶל־הַמָּק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֣ר
|
|||
NEH 1 9 lgh9 figs-explicit אֶל־הַמָּק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֣ר בָּחַ֔רְתִּי לְשַׁכֵּ֥ן אֶת־שְׁמִ֖י שָֽׁם 1 to the place where I have chosen to cause my name to dwell there This phrase refers initially to Jerusalem because that was where God chose to put his temple. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, where I have chosen for my name to remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 9 w4qw figs-metonymy אֶל־הַמָּק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֣ר בָּחַ֔רְתִּי לְשַׁכֵּ֥ן אֶת־שְׁמִ֖י שָֽׁם 1 to the place where I have chosen to cause my name to dwell there Nehemiah is actually using this phrase to refer to all of Judah. As the book explains later, when the Jews returned there, they each settled in their own former towns, though one in ten of them were recruited to live in Jerusalem. So Judah is being described by something associated with it, the capital city. Alternate translation: “to your homeland of Judah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 1 9 g88j figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖י 1 my name Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Their fame is described by something associated with it, how well known their name is and how people react to hearing it. Alternate translation: “reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 1 10 mjx7 figs-123person וְהֵ֥ם עֲבָדֶ֖יךָ וְעַמֶּ֑ךָ 1 And they are your servants and your people The word **they** refers to the Israelite people. Since Nehemiah is speaking on their behalf and including himself, you could say “we” in your translation if that would make things clearer for your readers. If your language marks the distinction, “we” should not include the addressee. Alternate translation: “we are your servants, your chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
NEH 1 10 mjx7 figs-123person וְהֵ֥ם עֲבָדֶ֖יךָ וְעַמֶּ֑ךָ 1 And they are your servants and your people The word **they** refers to the Israelite people. Since Nehemiah is speaking on their behalf and including himself, you could say “we” in your translation If it would be misunderstood in your language. If your language marks the distinction, “we” should not include the addressee. Alternate translation: “we are your servants, your chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
NEH 1 10 ab87 figs-parallelism וְהֵ֥ם עֲבָדֶ֖יךָ וְעַמֶּ֑ךָ 1 And they are your servants and your people As in [1:6](../01/06.md), **servants** refers to the special role that the people of Israel had as a model community of God’s followers. So these two phrases are basically saying the same thing. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “we are your chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 1 10 ab89 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר פָּדִ֨יתָ֙ 1 whom you redeemed This is a reference to the way God delivered the Israelites from slavery in Egypt. Alternate translation: “you rescued us from slavery in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 1 10 zu4s figs-doublet בְּכֹחֲךָ֣ הַגָּד֔וֹל וּבְיָדְךָ֖ הַחֲזָקָֽה 1 by your great power and by your strong hand These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize the intensity of Yahweh’s power. Alternate translation: “by your very great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -94,33 +94,33 @@ NEH 1 11 a21b figs-explicit הָאִ֣ישׁ הַזֶּ֑ה 1 this man As
|
|||
NEH 1 11 h9hl writing-background וַאֲנִ֛י הָיִ֥יתִי מַשְׁקֶ֖ה לַמֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Now as for me, I was a cupbearer for the king This is background information about Nehemiah’s role in the king’s court. Your language may have a special way to mark background information. As a “cupbearer,” it was Nehemiah’s duty to serve the wine at the king’s table, but he was much more than a waiter or butler. When the king gave him this assignment, this showed that he trusted Nehemiah completely to protect him from being poisoned. Nehemiah’s work also allowed him to see the king frequently and get to know him. So this was an important office. Alternate translation: “At that time, I was an important official who served the wine at the king’s table.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
NEH 2 intro mj1d 0 # Nehemiah 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins the account of the construction of the wall. Many scholars believe these chapters teach valuable lessons on leadership ([Nehemiah 2-6](./01.md)).<br><br>### Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Nehemiah’s character<br>Apparently, Nehemiah’s character made an impression on the king. It was very unusual for a king to be so concerned with one of his servants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Cultural Customs<br>In ancient Persia, people thought it was important for their conquered peoples to retain and practice their own cultural customs. It was thought that this independence promoted peace in their vast kingdom. The rebuilding of Jerusalem may have been seen as a way to allow for the Jewish cultural practices.<br><br>### Yahweh’s control<br>Yahweh is seen as very powerful. He is able to provide for his people even through a foreign king. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a23b writing-newevent וַיְהִ֣י 1 Then it happened that Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. Alternate translation: “Then one day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a25b figs-explicit בְּחֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן שְׁנַ֥ת עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 in the month of Nisan, in year twenty of Artaxerxes the King Since there were twelve months in the Hebrew calendar, and it was still the same year in the reign of Artaxerxes, this means that four months had gone by since Hanani came and spoke with Nehemiah. The implication is that Nehemiah had been praying all this time in the way described in chapter 1. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I prayed like this for four months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a25b figs-explicit בְּחֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן שְׁנַ֥ת עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 in the month of Nisan, in year twenty of Artaxerxes the King Since there were twelve months in the Hebrew calendar, and it was still the same year in the reign of Artaxerxes, this means that four months had gone by since Hanani came and spoke with Nehemiah. The implication is that Nehemiah had been praying all this time in the way described in chapter 1. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I prayed like this for four months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 h3hu translate-hebrewmonths בְּחֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן 1 In the month of Nisan **Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 l63f translate-ordinal שְׁנַ֥ת עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 in year twenty of Artaxerxes the king This is referring to the number of years that Artaxerxes had been reigning as king. Alternate translation: “in year 20 of the reign of Artaxerxes as the king of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 k1vf יַ֣יִן לְפָנָ֑יו 1 wine was before his face **Him** means King Artaxerxes. Alternate translation: “when it was time to serve him the wine”
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a24b figs-metaphor יַ֣יִן לְפָנָ֑יו 1 wine was before his face Here, **face** is a figurative way of referring to the presence of a person. This sentence means that a time had come when Nehemiah needed to serve wine to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a29b וָאֶשָּׂ֤א אֶת־הַיַּ֨יִן֙ וָאֶתְּנָ֣ה לַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 I lifted the wine, and I gave it to the king Alternate translation: “I poured a cup of wine and gave it to the king”
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a31b figs-idiom וְלֹא־הָיִ֥יתִי רַ֖ע לְפָנָֽיו 1 and I was not evil before his face In this context, **unpleasant** refers to a person looking sad or upset. Alternate translation: “I did not look sad in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a33b figs-explicit וְלֹא־הָיִ֥יתִי 1 and I was not The context suggests that **I was not** actually means **I had never been.** It seems that King Artaxerxes always wanted his officials to be cheerful in his presence. That is why Nehemaiah became afraid when the king asked him why he was sad. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say “I had never been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a33b figs-explicit וְלֹא־הָיִ֥יתִי 1 and I was not The context suggests that **I was not** actually means **I had never been.** It seems that King Artaxerxes always wanted his officials to be cheerful in his presence. That is why Nehemaiah became afraid when the king asked him why he was sad. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say “I had never been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 1 a38p figs-metaphor לְפָנָֽיו 1 before his face Here, **face** is a figurative way of referring to the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 n5wy figs-explicit וַיֹּאמֶר֩ לִ֨י הַמֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 And the king said to me The king must have noticed that Nehemiah looked sad because he asked about it. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But the king noticed that on this day I did look sad. So he asked me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 n5wy figs-explicit וַיֹּאמֶר֩ לִ֨י הַמֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 And the king said to me The king must have noticed that Nehemiah looked sad because he asked about it. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But the king noticed that on this day I did look sad. So he asked me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 ue51 figs-synecdoche מַדּ֣וּעַ ׀ פָּנֶ֣יךָ רָעִ֗ים 1 Why is your face evil? The king refers to Nehemiah by one part of him, his **face**, because the face shows one’s emotions. Alternate translation: “Why are you sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 a37b figs-idiom מַדּ֣וּעַ ׀ פָּנֶ֣יךָ רָעִ֗ים 1 Why is your face evil? As in [2:1](../02/01.md), **unpleasant** refers to a person looking sad or upset. Alternate translation: “Why are you sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 a39b וְאַתָּה֙ אֵֽינְךָ֣ חוֹלֶ֔ה 1 Now as for you, you are not sick Alternate translation: “I can tell that you are not sick.”
|
||||
NEH 2 2 g1k7 figs-personification אֵ֣ין זֶ֔ה כִּי־אִ֖ם רֹ֣עַֽ לֵ֑ב 1 This is nothing except evil of heart This phrase means **sadness of heart.** The king speaks as if Nehemiah’s heart were a living thing capable of having emotions. Alternate translation: “You must be very sad inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 a41b figs-doublenegatives אֵ֣ין זֶ֔ה כִּי־אִ֖ם רֹ֣עַֽ לֵ֑ב 1 This is nothing except evil of heart You can state this in a positive form: Alternate translation: “This can only be sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 eyt8 figs-explicit וָאִירָ֖א הַרְבֵּ֥ה מְאֹֽד 1 Then I was extremely much afraid The implication is that Nehemiah was very afraid because no one was supposed to look unhappy in the king’s presence. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This made me very afraid, because no one was supposed to look unhappy in the king’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 2 eyt8 figs-explicit וָאִירָ֖א הַרְבֵּ֥ה מְאֹֽד 1 Then I was extremely much afraid The implication is that Nehemiah was very afraid because no one was supposed to look unhappy in the king’s presence. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This made me very afraid, because no one was supposed to look unhappy in the king’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 qz4i figs-hyperbole הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ לְעוֹלָ֣ם יִחְיֶ֑ה 1 May the king live to eternity! Nehemiah is showing honor to King Artaxerxes. Here, **to eternity** is an exaggeration that refers to a long life. Alternate translation: “Long live the king” or “May you have a long life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 a43b figs-123person הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ לְעוֹלָ֣ם יִחְיֶ֑ה 1 May the king live to eternity! Nehemiah addresses the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can indicate this respect by adding an expression such as “Your Majesty.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 klj6 figs-rquestion מַדּ֜וּעַ לֹא־יֵרְע֣וּ פָנַ֗י 1 Why should not my face be evil Nehemiah is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect the king to give him reasons why he should not be sad. Instead, he is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am sorry, but I cannot help being sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 a45b figs-synecdoche מַדּ֜וּעַ לֹא־יֵרְע֣וּ פָנַ֗י 1 Why should not my face be evil Nehemiah refers to himself by one part of him, his **face**, because the face shows one’s emotions. Alternate translation: “I have very good reasons to be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 a47b figs-idiom מַדּ֜וּעַ לֹא־יֵרְע֣וּ פָנַ֗י 1 Why should not my face be evil Here, **unpleasant** refers to a person looking sad or upset. Alternate translation: “I have very good reasons to be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 a49b figs-explicit הָעִ֜יר…חֲרֵבָ֔ה 1 the city … is desolate **The city** means Jerusalem. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city of Jerusalem … lies in ruins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 a49b figs-explicit הָעִ֜יר…חֲרֵבָ֔ה 1 the city … is desolate **The city** means Jerusalem. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city of Jerusalem … lies in ruins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 ehz3 figs-metaphor בֵּית־קִבְר֤וֹת אֲבֹתַי֙ 1 the house of the graves of my fathers Here, **house** is a figurative way of referring to a place. Alternate translation: “the place where my ancestors are buried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 a51b figs-metonymy בֵּית־קִבְר֤וֹת אֲבֹתַי֙ 1 the house of the graves of my fathers Here, **fathers** figuratively means **ancestors.** Alternate translation: “the place where my ancestors are buried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 2 3 g7f4 figs-activepassive וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ אֻכְּל֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 its gates have been consumed by fire If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “fire has destroyed its gates” or “our enemies have burned its gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 2 4 a53b עַל־מַה־זֶּ֖ה אַתָּ֣ה מְבַקֵּ֑שׁ 1 For what is this you are seeking? Alternate translation: “What do you want me to do for you”
|
||||
NEH 2 4 a55b figs-explicit וָֽאֶתְפַּלֵּ֔ל 1 And I prayed The implication is that Nehemiah prayed to God before he answered the king. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before I answered him, I prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 4 a55b figs-explicit וָֽאֶתְפַּלֵּ֔ל 1 And I prayed The implication is that Nehemiah prayed to God before he answered the king. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before I answered him, I prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 4 a57b אֱלֹהֵ֖י הַשָּׁמָֽיִם 1 the God of heaven Alternate translation: “the God who is in heaven”
|
||||
NEH 2 5 uv1p וָאֹמַ֣ר לַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 And I said to the king Alternate translation: “Then I replied to the king”
|
||||
NEH 2 5 a59b figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַמֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that means, “If it seems good in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,9 +130,9 @@ NEH 2 5 u2zy figs-123person וְאִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּךָ
|
|||
NEH 2 5 a63b figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֧ר תִּשְׁלָחֵ֣נִי אֶל־יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 that you would send me to Judah Nehemiah is really asking for permission to go, rather than asking the king to send him. But as a sign of respect, he speaks as if the king would be taking the initiative. Alternate translation: “please allow me to go to Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 2 5 df8l עִ֛יר קִבְר֥וֹת אֲבֹתַ֖י 1 the city of the graves of my fathers This is similar to [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “the city where my ancestors are buried”
|
||||
NEH 2 5 l6nj figs-synecdoche וְאֶבְנֶֽנָּה 1 and I will build it Nehemiah does not plan to do all of the building himself, but he will be the leader of the work. Alternate translation: “that I and my people may rebuild it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a67b figs-explicit וְהַשֵּׁגַ֣ל ׀ יוֹשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶצְל֗וֹ 1 with the queen sitting beside him This detail indicates that this was a private meal, since the queen probably did not attend public banquets with the king. The implication is that the private meal gave Nehemiah the opportunity to speak freely. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. See UST. Alternate translation: “This was a private meal, with the queen sitting next to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a67b figs-explicit וְהַשֵּׁגַ֣ל ׀ יוֹשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶצְל֗וֹ 1 with the queen sitting beside him This detail indicates that this was a private meal, since the queen probably did not attend public banquets with the king. The implication is that the private meal gave Nehemiah the opportunity to speak freely. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. See UST. Alternate translation: “This was a private meal, with the queen sitting next to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a69b figs-parallelism עַד־מָתַ֛י יִהְיֶ֥ה מַֽהֲלָכֲךָ֖ וּמָתַ֣י תָּשׁ֑וּב 1 Until when will be your journey? And when will you return? These two phrases mean the same thing. The king says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is genuinely interested in Nehemiah’s situation. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “How long would you be away?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a71b figs-explicit וַיִּיטַ֤ב לִפְנֵֽי־הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וַיִּשְׁלָחֵ֔נִי 1 And it was good before the face of the king, and he sent me The implication is that Nehemiah told the king how long he would need to be away. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I told him how long I would be gone. That was acceptable to him, and he gave me permission to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a71b figs-explicit וַיִּיטַ֤ב לִפְנֵֽי־הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וַיִּשְׁלָחֵ֔נִי 1 And it was good before the face of the king, and he sent me The implication is that Nehemiah told the king how long he would need to be away. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I told him how long I would be gone. That was acceptable to him, and he gave me permission to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a73b figs-idiom וַיִּיטַ֤ב 1 And it was good As in verse 5, this is an idiom that means, “If it seems like a good idea to you.” Alternate translation: “That was acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a75b figs-synecdoche לִפְנֵֽי־הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 before the face of the king Nehemiah refers to the king by one part of him, his **face**, likely because the face shows one’s emotions. Alternate translation: “to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 2 6 a77b וַיִּשְׁלָחֵ֔נִי 1 and he sent me As in [2:5](../02/05.md), Nehemiah was really asking for permission to go, rather than asking the king to send him. But as a sign of respect, he speaks as if the king took the initiative. Alternate translation: “he gave me permission to go”
|
||||
|
|
@ -158,26 +158,26 @@ NEH 2 8 ac17 grammar-connect-logic-result כְּיַד־אֱלֹהַ֖י
|
|||
NEH 2 9 ac19 וָֽאָב֗וֹא אֶֽל־פַּֽחֲווֹת֙ עֵ֣בֶר הַנָּהָ֔ר 1 And I came to the governors of Beyond-the-River Alternate translation: “When I reached the province Beyond the River, I went to see its governors”
|
||||
NEH 2 9 ac21 translate-names עֵ֣בֶר הַנָּהָ֔ר 1 Beyond-the-River This is the name of a Persian province. See how you translated it in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 2 9 ac23 וָאֶתְּנָ֣ה לָהֶ֔ם אֵ֖ת אִגְּר֣וֹת הַמֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 I gave to them the letters of the king Alternate translation: “I showed them the letters the king had given me.”
|
||||
NEH 2 9 ac25 figs-explicit וָאֶתְּנָ֣ה לָהֶ֔ם אֵ֖ת אִגְּר֣וֹת הַמֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 I gave to them the letters of the king The implication is that when the governors saw the letters from the king, they allowed Nehemiah safe passage. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they gave me safe passage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 9 ac27 figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁלַ֤ח עִמִּי֙ הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ שָׂ֥רֵי חַ֖יִל וּפָרָשִֽׁים 1 And the king sent with me officers of the army and horsemen The implication is that the king did this when Nehemiah left for Judah, and that the purpose was to protect him on his journey. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When I left to travel to Judah, the king sent along some army officers and soldiers riding on horses to protect me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 9 ac25 figs-explicit וָאֶתְּנָ֣ה לָהֶ֔ם אֵ֖ת אִגְּר֣וֹת הַמֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 I gave to them the letters of the king The implication is that when the governors saw the letters from the king, they allowed Nehemiah safe passage. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they gave me safe passage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 9 ac27 figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁלַ֤ח עִמִּי֙ הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ שָׂ֥רֵי חַ֖יִל וּפָרָשִֽׁים 1 And the king sent with me officers of the army and horsemen The implication is that the king did this when Nehemiah left for Judah, and that the purpose was to protect him on his journey. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When I left to travel to Judah, the king sent along some army officers and soldiers riding on horses to protect me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 9 ac29 figs-events וַיִּשְׁלַ֤ח עִמִּי֙ הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ שָׂ֥רֵי חַ֖יִל וּפָרָשִֽׁים 1 And the king sent with me officers of the army and horsemen You can put this information first because it happened before Nehemiah showed his letters to the governors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac31 figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁמַ֞ע סַנְבַלַּ֣ט הַחֹרֹנִ֗י וְטֽוֹבִיָּה֙ הָעֶ֣בֶד הָֽעַמֹּנִ֔י 1 Then Sanballat the Horonite and Tobiah, the servant, the Ammonite, heard Sanballat was the governor of Samaria, the area right next to Judah. So he was one of the people Nehemiah would have shown a letter from the king authorizing his trip. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This was how Sanballat the Horonite and his deputy Tobiah the Ammonite learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac31 figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁמַ֞ע סַנְבַלַּ֣ט הַחֹרֹנִ֗י וְטֽוֹבִיָּה֙ הָעֶ֣בֶד הָֽעַמֹּנִ֔י 1 Then Sanballat the Horonite and Tobiah, the servant, the Ammonite, heard Sanballat was the governor of Samaria, the area right next to Judah. So he was one of the people Nehemiah would have shown a letter from the king authorizing his trip. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This was how Sanballat the Horonite and his deputy Tobiah the Ammonite learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 yz8p translate-names סַנְבַלַּ֣ט הַחֹרֹנִ֗י 1 Sanballat the Horonite Sanballat is the name of a man, and Horonite is the name of his people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 eh4c translate-names וְטֽוֹבִיָּה֙…הָֽעַמֹּנִ֔י 1 and Tobiah … the Ammonite Tobiah is the name of a man, and Ammonite is the name of his people group. Tobiah’s name occurs over a dozen times in the book of Nehemiah. It will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 vb3p וְטֽוֹבִיָּה֙ הָעֶ֣בֶד 1 and Tobiah, the servant From the role that Tobiah plays in the book, this phrase seems to indicate that he was the official who served directly under Sanballat. Alternate translation: “Tobiah, his deputy”
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac33 figs-explicit וַיֵּ֥רַע לָהֶ֖ם רָעָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה אֲשֶׁר־בָּ֥א אָדָ֔ם לְבַקֵּ֥שׁ טוֹבָ֖ה לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 And it was evil to them, a great evil, that someone had come to seek good for the sons of Israel The implication is that Sanballat and Tobiah did not want to see Judah become strong again because that would be a threat to the power and influence of Samaria. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac33 figs-explicit וַיֵּ֥רַע לָהֶ֖ם רָעָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה אֲשֶׁר־בָּ֥א אָדָ֔ם לְבַקֵּ֥שׁ טוֹבָ֖ה לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 And it was evil to them, a great evil, that someone had come to seek good for the sons of Israel The implication is that Sanballat and Tobiah did not want to see Judah become strong again because that would be a threat to the power and influence of Samaria. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac35 figs-idiom וַיֵּ֥רַע לָהֶ֖ם רָעָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 And it was evil to them, a great evil Here **evil** means “bad,” so this expression is the opposite of “if it is good to you” in [2:5](../02/05.md) and [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “They thought it was a bad thing, a very bad thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac37 figs-doublet וַיֵּ֥רַע לָהֶ֖ם רָעָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 And it was evil to them, a great evil These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. Nehemiah uses them together for emphasis. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they became very upset” or “they did not like it at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac39 figs-idiom אֲשֶׁר־בָּ֥א אָדָ֔ם לְבַקֵּ֥שׁ טוֹבָ֖ה לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 that someone had come to seek good for the sons of Israel **To seek good for** means “to help.” Alternate translation: “that someone had come to help the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 2 10 ac41 figs-gendernotations לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 for the sons of Israel As in [1:6](../01/06.md), **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
NEH 2 11 ac43 figs-explicit וָאָב֖וֹא אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 And I came to Jerusalem Here the text might be implying that Nehemiah made it safely to Jerusalem anyway, despite the opposition of Sanballat and Tobiah. Alternate translation: “But I made it safely to Jerusalem despite their opposition.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 11 ac45 וָאֱהִי־שָׁ֖ם יָמִ֥ים שְׁלֹשָֽׁה 1 and I was there three days This phrase seems to look ahead to the next verse, and you could translate it that way and make it the start of the next sentence. Alternate translation: “After I had been there for three days”
|
||||
NEH 2 12 ac47 figs-explicit וָאָק֣וּם ׀ לַ֗יְלָה 1 Then I arose in the night The implication is that Nehemiah went out to inspect the city walls, as described in 1:13–15(../01/13.md). The implication is also that he did this at night so that no one would know he was doing it. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I got up secretly in the night to inspect the city walls.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 12 ac47 figs-explicit וָאָק֣וּם ׀ לַ֗יְלָה 1 Then I arose in the night The implication is that Nehemiah went out to inspect the city walls, as described in 1:13–15(../01/13.md). The implication is also that he did this at night so that no one would know he was doing it. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I got up secretly in the night to inspect the city walls.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 12 ac49 figs-gendernotations אֲנִי֮ וַאֲנָשִׁ֣ים ׀ מְעַט֮ עִמִּי֒ 1 myself and a few men with me The word **men** here could conceivably include both men and women. However, for a nighttime mission through the ruins of the city walls, it’s likely that Nehemiah brought along only other men. So in this context you could use a word that indicates that. Alternate translation: “I brought only a few other men with me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
NEH 2 12 ac51 figs-hyperbole וְלֹא־הִגַּ֣דְתִּי לְאָדָ֔ם מָ֗ה אֱלֹהַי֙ נֹתֵ֣ן אֶל־לִבִּ֔י לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת לִירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 and I did not tell anyone what my God had been giving to my heart to do for Jerusalem Probably Nehemiah told at least some people, since he brought a few men with him when he went out to inspect the walls. So “not … anyone” might be an exaggeration that emphasizes the secrecy Nehemiah maintained. Alternate translation: “I did not say publicly what God had led me to do for Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
NEH 2 12 ac53 grammar-connect-logic-result וְלֹא־הִגַּ֣דְתִּי לְאָדָ֔ם מָ֗ה אֱלֹהַי֙ נֹתֵ֣ן אֶל־לִבִּ֔י לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת לִירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 and I did not tell anyone If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can give this explanation before describing Nehemiah’s nighttime mission, because it is the reason that explains the result of him maintaining so much secrecy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 2 12 s72w figs-metaphor מָ֗ה אֱלֹהַי֙ נֹתֵ֣ן אֶל־לִבִּ֔י לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת 1 had put into my heart Here, Nehemiah’s **heart** figuratively represents his thoughts and will. Alternate translation: “what God had inspired me to do” or “what God had led me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 2 12 wd63 figs-explicit וּבְהֵמָה֙ אֵ֣ין עִמִּ֔י 1 Now there was no animal with me The implication is that this was another measure to maintain secrecy. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “To keep things quiet, there were no other animals with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 12 wd63 figs-explicit וּבְהֵמָה֙ אֵ֣ין עִמִּ֔י 1 Now there was no animal with me The implication is that this was another measure to maintain secrecy. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “To keep things quiet, there were no other animals with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 13 au61 figs-synecdoche וָאֵצְאָ֨ה 1 I went out Even though he brought a few men with him, Nehemiah says “I” because he was the primary person conducting this inspection. In this narrative, he represents the entire group. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say “we” in your translation to express this meaning. If your language makes this distinction, “we” would not include the addressee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 2 13 ac55 translate-names בְשַֽׁעַר־הַגַּ֜יא 1 at the gate of the valley This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “at the Valley Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 2 13 az64 figs-metonymy וְאֶל־פְּנֵי֙ עֵ֣ין הַתַּנִּ֔ין 1 even to the face of the spring of the dragon Here, **face** figuratively means the front of an object. This means that the group passed in front of the well. Alternate translation: “we went past the Dragon Well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -221,10 +221,10 @@ NEH 2 19 et87 translate-names סַנְבַלַּ֨ט הַחֹרֹנִ֜י 1 S
|
|||
NEH 2 19 a19c translate-names וְטֹבִיָּ֣ה…הָֽעַמּוֹנִ֗י 1 and Tobiah … the Ammonite Tobiah is the name of a man, and Ammonite is the name of his people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 a21c וְטֹבִיָּ֣ה ׀ הָעֶ֣בֶד 1 and Tobiah, the servant See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “Tobiah, his deputy”
|
||||
NEH 2 19 cxe8 translate-names וְגֶ֨שֶׁם֙ הָֽעַרְבִ֔י 1 and Geshem the Arabian Geshem is the name of a man, and Arabian is the name of his people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 a23c figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁמַע֩ 1 Then … heard The implication is that these men learned that the Jews in Jerusalem had started to rebuild the city walls. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “learned that we had started to rebuild the walls of Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 a23c figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁמַע֩ 1 Then … heard The implication is that these men learned that the Jews in Jerusalem had started to rebuild the city walls. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “learned that we had started to rebuild the walls of Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 a25c figs-parallelism וַיַּלְעִ֣גוּ לָ֔נוּ וַיִּבְז֖וּ עָלֵ֑ינוּ 1 and they mocked us, and they despised us These two statements mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how contemptuous and dismissive these enemies were being. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “they ridiculed us mercilessly,” otherwise “they made fun of us and ridiculed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 ww1k figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים הַעַ֥ל הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ אַתֶּ֥ם מֹרְדִֽים 1 What is this thing that you are doing? Are you rebelling against the king? These enemies are not asking questions that they expect Nehemiah to answer. They are using the question form to mock him. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate their words as statements. Alternate translation: “What you are doing is not going to amount to anything! But you should not be rebelling against the king!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 u8ri figs-explicit מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים 1 What is this thing that you are doing? The implication is that this **thing** is really “nothing” at all. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “What you are doing is not going to amount to anything!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 ww1k figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים הַעַ֥ל הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ אַתֶּ֥ם מֹרְדִֽים 1 What is this thing that you are doing? Are you rebelling against the king? These enemies are not asking questions that they expect Nehemiah to answer. They are using the question form to mock him. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate their words as statements. Alternate translation: “What you are doing is not going to amount to anything! But you should not be rebelling against the king!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
NEH 2 19 u8ri figs-explicit מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים 1 What is this thing that you are doing? The implication is that this **thing** is really “nothing” at all. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “What you are doing is not going to amount to anything!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 20 a27c figs-explicit וָאָשִׁ֨יב אוֹתָ֜ם דָּבָ֗ר וָאוֹמַ֤ר לָהֶם֙ 1 Then I returned them a word, and I said to them This might imply a contrast between the intimidation his enemies wanted him to feel and the courage that God gave him. You could use a word like “but” to indicate this contrast. Alternate translation: “But in response I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 2 20 a29c figs-parallelism וָאָשִׁ֨יב אוֹתָ֜ם דָּבָ֗ר וָאוֹמַ֤ר לָהֶם֙ 1 Then I returned them a word, and I said to them These two statements mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how firmly he responded to these enemies. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “But I answered them firmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 2 20 a31c אֱלֹהֵ֣י הַשָּׁמַ֔יִם ה֚וּא יַצְלִ֣יחַֽ לָ֔נוּ 1 The God of heaven, he will cause us to succeed Alternate translation: “The God who is in heaven will enable us to complete this project.”
|
||||
|
|
@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ NEH 2 20 iv9x figs-idiom נָק֣וּם וּבָנִ֑ינוּ 1 will arise a
|
|||
NEH 2 20 a4e6 figs-doublet וְלָכֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּצְדָקָ֛ה וְזִכָּר֖וֹן בִּירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 But you have no share, no right, and no historic claim in Jerusalem The terms **share**, **right**, and **memorial** all mean something similar. Nehemiah uses them together for emphasis. The meanings are not entirely certain. “Share” may suggest that the Samaritans are not part of the community. “Right” may mean that they have no legal basis to say what should happen in Jerusalem. “Memorial” could mean that they had have no role in the city’s history, or that there is no record of their Israelite ancestry. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (Note: A doublet can involve the use of more than two terms.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 2 20 a35c figs-abstractnouns וְלָכֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּצְדָקָ֛ה וְזִכָּר֖וֹן בִּירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 But you have no share, no right, and no historic claim in Jerusalem Depending on their meaning, the terms “share,” “right,” and “memorial” may be abstract nouns. If so, you could translate the idea behind them with a phrase that expresses their overall meaning. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 3 intro dfw6 0 # Nehemiah 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Priests<br>The priests worked on rebuilding the city. Normally, the priests were exempt from this type of work. Because they helped, it emphasizes that this is a holy work and something done for Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Cooperation<br>Everyone worked on this project. Many names are mentioned to emphasize the cooperation between the different families. Each was given a section of the wall to rebuild.
|
||||
NEH 3 1 ald8 figs-explicit וַיָּ֡קָם אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩ הַכֹּהֵ֨ן הַגָּד֜וֹל 1 And Eliashib the high priest rose up This chapter records the names of the people who repaired the wall of Jerusalem, and it describes what parts of the wall they worked on. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly at the start of the chapter. (In this book Nehemiah records everything he did to help the people of Judah, and he prays that God will remember him and bless him for what he did. We see in this chapter that he also wants God to remember and bless everyone else who helped.) Alternate translation: “These are the names of the people who helped to rebuild the wall around Jerusalem. Now Eliashib the high priest rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 3 1 ald8 figs-explicit וַיָּ֡קָם אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩ הַכֹּהֵ֨ן הַגָּד֜וֹל 1 And Eliashib the high priest rose up This chapter records the names of the people who repaired the wall of Jerusalem, and it describes what parts of the wall they worked on. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly at the start of the chapter. (In this book Nehemiah records everything he did to help the people of Judah, and he prays that God will remember him and bless him for what he did. We see in this chapter that he also wants God to remember and bless everyone else who helped.) Alternate translation: “These are the names of the people who helped to rebuild the wall around Jerusalem. Now Eliashib the high priest rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 3 1 a37c figs-idiom וַיָּ֡קָם 1 And … rose up As in [2:18](../02/18.md), **rise up** here means to begin something. Alternate translation: “began to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 3 1 g9az translate-names אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩ 1 Eliashib This is the name of a man. It occurs about a dozen times in the book of Nehemiah. It will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 3 1 a39c translate-unknown הַכֹּהֵ֨ן הַגָּד֜וֹל 1 the high priest This means that Eliashib was the leader of the priests who conducted worship in the temple and performed many other religious and community functions. Alternate translation: “the priest who was in charge in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ NEH 3 2 q84s translate-names זַכּ֖וּר בֶּן־אִמְרִֽי 1 Zaccu
|
|||
NEH 3 3 bbm9 translate-names הַסְּנָאָ֑ה 1 Hassenaah Hassenaah is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 3 3 if44 translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הַדָּגִ֔ים 1 the gate of fish This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Fish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 3 3 kxd6 וַֽיַּעֲמִ֨ידוּ֙ דַּלְתֹתָ֔יו מַנְעוּלָ֖יו וּבְרִיחָֽיו 1 They themselves laid its beams and erected its doors, its bolts, and its bars This expression occurs several times in this chapter. It would be helpful to your readers to translate it consistently. Alternate translation: “They framed it with wooden beams, they set its doors in place, and they installed bolts and bars”
|
||||
NEH 3 3 kc48 figs-explicit מַנְעוּלָ֖יו וּבְרִיחָֽיו 1 its bolts, and its bars Bolts and bars locked the gates securely. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “bolts and bars for locking the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 3 3 kc48 figs-explicit מַנְעוּלָ֖יו וּבְרִיחָֽיו 1 its bolts, and its bars Bolts and bars locked the gates securely. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “bolts and bars for locking the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 3 4 nn6j figs-ellipsis הֶחֱזִ֗יק…הֶחֱזִ֔יק…הֶֽחֱזִ֔יק 1 strengthened … strengthened **Strengthened** means “repaired.” It refers to repairing the wall, although Nehemiah does not specify this. This expression occurs several times in this chapter. It would be helpful to your readers to translate it consistently. Alternate translation: “repaired the next section of of the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
NEH 3 4 c8hi translate-names מְרֵמ֤וֹת בֶּן־אוּרִיָּה֙ בֶּן־הַקּ֔וֹץ 1 Meremoth, the son of Uriah, the son of Hakkoz Meremoth is the name of a man, Uriah is the name of his father, and Hakkoz is the name of his grandfather. Alternate translation: “Meremoth, the son of Uriah and grandson of Hakkoz” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 3 4 inh2 translate-names מְשֻׁלָּ֥ם בֶּן־בֶּרֶכְיָ֖ה בֶּן־מְשֵׁיזַבְאֵ֑ל 1 Meshullam, the son of Berechiah, the son of Meshezabel Meshullam is the name of a man, Berechiah is the name of his father, and Meshezabel is the name of his grandfather. Alternate translation: “Meshullam, the son of Berekiah and grandson of Meshezabel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ NEH 4 2 b96n figs-activepassive מֵעֲרֵמ֥וֹת הֶעָפָ֖ר ו
|
|||
NEH 4 3 alw5 translate-names וְטוֹבִיָּ֥ה הָעַמֹּנִ֖י 1 And Tobiah the Ammonite This is a man’s name. See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 4 3 b24b גַּ֚ם 1 Yes This word indicates that Tobiah agrees with Sanballat and that he is going to say something to support him. Alternate translation: “That’s right!”
|
||||
NEH 4 3 da2t figs-hyperbole אֲשֶׁר־הֵ֣ם בּוֹנִ֔ים אִם־יַעֲלֶ֣ה שׁוּעָ֔ל וּפָרַ֖ץ חוֹמַ֥ת אַבְנֵיהֶֽם 1 If only a fox went up on what they are building, then he would break down their wall of stones Tobiah probably does not believe that the wall would really fall down if a fox walked along the top of it. He is exaggerating to mock the work the Jews are doing. You could use a non-figurative expression in your translation instead, such as, “It wouldn’t take much to make that wall fall over.” However, Tobiah’s expression is so colorful that you may want to retain it, but be sure that your readers understand he is exaggerating. Alternate translation: “Tobiah made fun of the Jews by saying, ‘That wall they are building is so weak that if a fox climbed up on it, the stones would fall to the ground’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
NEH 4 4 buk3 figs-explicit שְׁמַ֤ע אֱלֹהֵ֨ינוּ֙ 1 Hear, our God Nehemiah starts talking directly to God at this point in the book. The implication is that he heard about what Sanballat and Tobiah were saying, and in response, he prayed the prayer that is recorded here in 2:4-5. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When I heard about what they were saying, I prayed and said, ‘Listen, our God’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 4 buk3 figs-explicit שְׁמַ֤ע אֱלֹהֵ֨ינוּ֙ 1 Hear, our God Nehemiah starts talking directly to God at this point in the book. The implication is that he heard about what Sanballat and Tobiah were saying, and in response, he prayed the prayer that is recorded here in 2:4-5. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When I heard about what they were saying, I prayed and said, ‘Listen, our God’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 4 a77c figs-aside שְׁמַ֤ע אֱלֹהֵ֨ינוּ֙ 1 Hear, our God Nehemiah’s prayer here is a particular type of aside. In an aside, someone who is speaking to or about one person or group will pause and speak confidentially to somebody else about them. Often an aside is spoken to the audience of a work about someone who is being addressed within the work. But in this case, Nehemiah pauses from addressing the audience that is hearing his story; he speaks confidentially to God in prayer about two of the characters in the story. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could show this is a prayer is distinct from the story by making it a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
|
||||
NEH 4 4 ae62 figs-abstractnouns הָיִ֣ינוּ בוּזָ֔ה 1 we are a contempt The abstract noun **contempt** refers to the way Sanballat and Tobiah regarded the Jews, which led them to make fun of the Jews. You can translate the idea behind this term with a verb like “mocking.” Alternate translation: “our enemies are mocking us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 4 4 z6nz figs-idiom וְהָשֵׁ֥ב חֶרְפָּתָ֖ם אֶל־רֹאשָׁ֑ם 1 and cause their taunts to return on their heads! **Return on his head** is an idiom that means that what a person expected to happen to someone else happens to them instead. Alternate translation: “Make them people whom others will mock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ NEH 4 10 vc8h וְהֶעָפָ֖ר 1 and … rubble Alternate translation
|
|||
NEH 4 10 ad17 וַאֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ לֹ֣א נוּכַ֔ל לִבְנ֖וֹת בַּחוֹמָֽה 1 And as for us, we are not able to build the wall. Alternate translation: “We are not going to be able to finish rebuilding the wall”
|
||||
NEH 4 11 yuc9 figs-parallelism לֹ֤א יֵדְעוּ֙ וְלֹ֣א יִרְא֔וּ עַ֛ד אֲשֶׁר־נָב֥וֹא אֶל־תּוֹכָ֖ם 1 They will not know, and they will not see until when we come into their midst These two phrases mean similar things. The enemies use the repetition to emphasize how confident they are of launching a surprise attack. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They will not be expecting an attack until we are right there,” otherwise “before they see us and know we are coming, we will rush down on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 4 11 ad19 figs-metaphor וְלֹ֣א יִרְא֔וּ 1 and they will not see While the enemies could be referring to the Jews literally not seeing them approach, “seeing” could also be a figuratively way of describing knowledge, notice, or attention. In that case this expression would mean the same thing as “they will not know.” Alternate translation: “they will not be expecting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 4 12 ad21 figs-explicit בָּ֣אוּ 1 came The implication is that they came to Jerusalem to speak with the Jewish leaders there. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “came to Jerusalem to speak with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 12 ad21 figs-explicit בָּ֣אוּ 1 came The implication is that they came to Jerusalem to speak with the Jewish leaders there. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “came to Jerusalem to speak with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 12 t8f2 figs-synecdoche הַיְּהוּדִ֔ים הַיֹּשְׁבִ֖ים אֶצְלָ֑ם 1 the Jews dwelling beside them **Them** means the enemies Nehemiah has been talking about, so this expression likely refers to the Jews who lived near Nehemiah and those helping him. But it does not mean all of these Jews, just some who came to Jerusalem. Nehemiah is describing part of this group as if it were the whole group. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews who lived near our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 4 12 b3zk figs-idiom וַיֹּ֤אמְרוּ לָ֨נוּ֙ עֶ֣שֶׂר פְּעָמִ֔ים 1 spoke to us ten times Here the number 10 is used to represent “many.” Alternate translation: “spoke to us many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 4 12 ad23 figs-explicit מִכָּל־הַמְּקֹמ֖וֹת אֲשֶׁר־תָּשׁ֥וּבוּ עָלֵֽינוּ 1 From all the places where you turn, they are on us The meaning of this Hebrew phrase is uncertain. However, one explanation that would fit the context is that these exposed Jewish communities sent representatives to Jerusalem to tell Nehemiah that they were afraid of being attacked in their villages. The “places where you return” could mean “anywhere we live,” referring to the villages, and “they are on us” could mean that the enemies could attack these undefended towns at any time. Perhaps these representatives were asking Nehemiah to release their able-bodied men from work duty and send them home so they could help defend their families and neighbors. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say something like this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Our enemies could attack us anywhere we live, so let our men return home so they can defend us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ NEH 4 13 xc8b וָֽאַעֲמִ֞יד מִֽתַּחְתִּיּ֧וֹת
|
|||
NEH 4 13 mj33 figs-synecdoche וָֽאַעֲמִ֤יד אֶת־הָעָם֙ לְמִשְׁפָּח֔וֹת 1 I stationed the people by families This does not mean all the people, and it does not mean every member of every family. Nehemiah is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them, and part of each family as if it were the whole family. Chapter 3 describes how Nehemiah organized the work on the wall by family and community groups. He seems to have organized the defense of the city the same way. Alternate translation: “I positioned people from each family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 4 13 ad27 translate-unknown וְקַשְּׁתֹתֵיהֶֽם 1 and their bows This means not just bows, but bows and arrows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
NEH 4 14 l4uz וָאֵ֣רֶא 1 This likely means that Nehemiah literally looked over all the defenses he had put in place. Alternate translation: “After I had inspected everything”
|
||||
NEH 4 14 h68n figs-explicit וָאָק֗וּם וָאֹמַ֞ר 1 Since Nehemiah immediately addresses a group of people, the implication is that he gathered them together to speak to them. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I summoned … and I told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 14 h68n figs-explicit וָאָק֗וּם וָאֹמַ֞ר 1 Since Nehemiah immediately addresses a group of people, the implication is that he gathered them together to speak to them. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I summoned … and I told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 14 f9hq figs-idiom וָאָק֗וּם 1 In this context, the expression “rose up” likely is a way of saying that Nehemiah took public action, not that he had been sitting or lying down and got up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 4 14 iy4j אֶל־הַחֹרִ֤ים וְאֶל־הַסְּגָנִים֙ 1 See how you translated these terms in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “to the leading citizens and the city officials”
|
||||
NEH 4 14 mza7 figs-synecdoche יֶ֣תֶר הָעָ֔ם 1 This does not mean all of the other people who lived in Jerusalem, but rather many of them who came to hear Nehemiah speak on this occasion. He is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them. Alternate translation: “many of the other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -444,10 +444,10 @@ NEH 4 14 x0ri figs-doublet הַגָּד֤וֹל וְהַנּוֹרָא
|
|||
NEH 4 14 c8s7 figs-metaphor אֲחֵיכֶם֙ 1 Here, **brother** could mean biological brothers, but it is more likely that it refers figuratively to a person’s relatives, that is, their whole family. Alternate translation: “your families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 puc1 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֞י כַּֽאֲשֶׁר 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 qxa7 figs-activepassive נ֣וֹדַֽע לָ֔נוּ 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we found out about their plans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 lgih figs-explicit נ֣וֹדַֽע לָ֔נוּ 1 **It** means the plan of these enemies to launch a surprise attack, as described in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we found out about their plans to launch a surprise attack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 lgih figs-explicit נ֣וֹדַֽע לָ֔נוּ 1 **It** means the plan of these enemies to launch a surprise attack, as described in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we found out about their plans to launch a surprise attack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 e4mc וַיָּ֥פֶר הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶת־עֲצָתָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “and God had kept them from doing what they planned.”
|
||||
NEH 4 15 f236 figs-metonymy וַנָּ֤שָׁב כֻּלָּ֨נוּ֙ אֶל־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־מְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 Here, **the wall** means the work on the wall. Nehemiah is describing this work figuratively by referring to something associated with it, the wall that was the object of the work. Alternate translation: “we all went back to working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 g1de figs-explicit וַנָּ֤שָׁב כֻּלָּ֨נוּ֙ אֶל־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־מְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 The implication is that when the enemies realized the Jews knew about their plans, they decided not to attack. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They decided not to attack us, and we all went back to working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 g1de figs-explicit וַנָּ֤שָׁב כֻּלָּ֨נוּ֙ אֶל־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־מְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 The implication is that when the enemies realized the Jews knew about their plans, they decided not to attack. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They decided not to attack us, and we all went back to working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 15 doov figs-idiom אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־מְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person.” It does not refer only to an adult male. Alternate translation: “Each person continued doing the same work as before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 4 16 rtac figs-idiom מִן־הַיּ֣וֹם הַה֗וּא 1 In this context, **day** may not refer to one specific day, but rather to a more general time. Alternate translation: “from that time on” or “after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 4 16 gh9g figs-idiom נְעָרַי֮ עֹשִׂ֣ים בַּמְּלָאכָה֒ 1 This expression refers to the servants who worked for Nehemiah. While they probably were young adult males, the expression is specifically envisioning their role and status. Alternate translation: “my servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ NEH 4 16 rgab figs-explicit עֹשִׂ֣ים בַּמְּלָאכָה֒ 1 Th
|
|||
NEH 4 16 f9in translate-fraction חֲצִ֣י נְעָרַי֮ 1 **Half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
|
||||
NEH 4 16 nf2h translate-unknown וְהַקְּשָׁת֖וֹת 1 As in [4:13](../04/13.md), this means not just bows, but bows and arrows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
NEH 4 16 i7wi וְהַ֨שָּׂרִ֔ים אַחֲרֵ֖י כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 This likely means that certain officials literally stood behind the workers and the guards. That is, they were inside the wall and close to it, while the guards stood right at the wall and the workers worked on it. Alternate translation: “Officers stood behind all the workers and guards”
|
||||
NEH 4 16 gl4t figs-explicit וְהַ֨שָּׂרִ֔ים אַחֲרֵ֖י כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 The implication is that the leaders were there to give orders in case there was an attack. But it is likely that Nehemiah also wanted them to offer encouragement and maintain good morale. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Officers stood behind all the workers and guards to encourage everyone and to give orders in case there was an attack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 16 gl4t figs-explicit וְהַ֨שָּׂרִ֔ים אַחֲרֵ֖י כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 The implication is that the leaders were there to give orders in case there was an attack. But it is likely that Nehemiah also wanted them to offer encouragement and maintain good morale. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Officers stood behind all the workers and guards to encourage everyone and to give orders in case there was an attack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 16 ijcj וְהַ֨שָּׂרִ֔ים 1 From the context here and the use of this term in [7:2](../07/02.md), it appears that these “officials” were responsible for giving commands in military situations. Alternate translation: “and officers”
|
||||
NEH 4 16 d9r4 figs-metaphor כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 Here, the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. All of the descendants of Judah are being described figuratively as if they were one household living together. So this would ordinarily mean “the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 4 16 p1dv figs-synecdoche כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 However, in this context, the expression is not referring to all the people of Judah. Nehemiah is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them. He means all of the workers and guards. The expression helps clarify that Nehemiah is no longer speaking just of his own servants, whom had divided into two groups to serve as workers and guards. Alternate translation: “all the workers and guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ NEH 4 19 yn7h וָאֹמַ֞ר 1 See how you translated these terms in [2:1
|
|||
NEH 4 19 xi9g figs-synecdoche הַחֹרִ֤ים…הַסְּגָנִים֙ 1 As in [4:14](../04/14.md), this does not mean all of the other people who lived in Jerusalem, but rather many of them who came to hear Nehemiah speak on this occasion. He is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them. Alternate translation: “many of the other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 4 19 agy3 figs-doublet הַמְּלָאכָ֥ה הַרְבֵּ֖ה וּרְחָבָ֑ה 1 **Great** and **vast** mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize the scope of the rebuilding project. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “large-scale” or “huge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 4 19 p5fh figs-idiom וַאֲנַ֗חְנוּ נִפְרָדִים֙ עַל־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה רְחוֹקִ֖ים אִ֥ישׁ מֵאָחִֽיו 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person,” and **brother** means “fellow Jew.” Alternate translation: “each of us is far apart from our fellow Jews along the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 4 20 tm9s figs-explicit אֶת־ק֣וֹל הַשּׁוֹפָ֔ר 1 The implication is that the workers and guards would need to gather together to fight off an attack. The implication is also that while the people were widely scattered, they would all be able to hear the ram’s horn even from a distance, and so it would be an effective signal. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “So if we all need to gather in one place to fight off an attack, I will have someone blow a ram’s horn there. You will be able to hear this signal from anywhere along the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 20 tm9s figs-explicit אֶת־ק֣וֹל הַשּׁוֹפָ֔ר 1 The implication is that the workers and guards would need to gather together to fight off an attack. The implication is also that while the people were widely scattered, they would all be able to hear the ram’s horn even from a distance, and so it would be an effective signal. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “So if we all need to gather in one place to fight off an attack, I will have someone blow a ram’s horn there. You will be able to hear this signal from anywhere along the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 20 i5t4 translate-unknown הַשּׁוֹפָ֔ר 1 See how you translated this in [4:18](../04/18.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
NEH 4 20 qml6 אֱלֹהֵ֖ינוּ יִלָּ֥חֶם לָֽנוּ 1 This does not mean that God will fight instead of the Jews, but that God will take their side and help them win. Alternate translation: “God will help us defeat our enemies”
|
||||
NEH 4 21 opos figs-explicit וַאֲנַ֖חְנוּ עֹשִׂ֣ים בַּמְּלָאכָ֑ה 1 This means the **work** of rebuilding the wall. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “So we continued to work on rebuilding the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -477,8 +477,8 @@ NEH 4 21 w4uu figs-merism מֵעֲל֣וֹת הַשַּׁ֔חַר עַ֖ד
|
|||
NEH 4 21 jl3h מֵעֲל֣וֹת הַשַּׁ֔חַר 1 This phrase refers to the daily appearance of light rising in the east in the early morning hours prior to the sun rising above the horizon. Alternate translation: “the first light of day”
|
||||
NEH 4 21 ww7q figs-metaphor צֵ֥את הַכּוֹכָבִֽים 1 Here Nehemiah describes the appearing of the stars as if they **came out** of an enclosed container. Alternate translation: “the very beginning of the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 4 22 j1fu figs-idiom אִ֣ישׁ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person” and more specifically “each worker.” As in 4:16, “young man” means servant. Alternate translation: “each worker and his servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 4 22 r87p figs-explicit בְּת֣וֹךְ יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 This could be referring to workers who had come from nearby cities and towns to help rebuild the wall. It could also include people who lived in the Jerusalem area but whose homes were outside the city, such as local farmers. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spend the night inside Jerusalem and not go home if they live outside the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 22 gjm3 וְהָֽיוּ־לָ֧נוּ הַלַּ֛יְלָה מִשְׁמָ֖ר וְהַיּ֥וֹם מְלָאכָֽה 1 The idea is not that these men would be on guard duty all night and then work all day on the wall. Rather, their presence in the city would mean that a large number of defenders would be ready on short notice if needed. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “That way the city will have plenty of defenders even at night, and they can still work on the wall during the daytime”
|
||||
NEH 4 22 r87p figs-explicit בְּת֣וֹךְ יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 This could be referring to workers who had come from nearby cities and towns to help rebuild the wall. It could also include people who lived in the Jerusalem area but whose homes were outside the city, such as local farmers. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spend the night inside Jerusalem and not go home if they live outside the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 4 22 gjm3 וְהָֽיוּ־לָ֧נוּ הַלַּ֛יְלָה מִשְׁמָ֖ר וְהַיּ֥וֹם מְלָאכָֽה 1 The idea is not that these men would be on guard duty all night and then work all day on the wall. Rather, their presence in the city would mean that a large number of defenders would be ready on short notice if needed. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “That way the city will have plenty of defenders even at night, and they can still work on the wall during the daytime”
|
||||
NEH 4 23 llry grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְאֵ֨ין 1 In this verse Nehemiah is describing something else that was also true of the conditions in Jerusalem during the time period he is describing. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “At that time, neither” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
|
||||
NEH 4 23 g8mf figs-metonymy וְאַחַ֣י 1 Here **brother** likely refers to Nehemiah’s close relatives. Elsewhere in the book he indicates that his brother Hanani lived in the city and that his relatives ate with him at the governor’s table ([1:2](../01/02.md), [5:14](../05/14.md), [7:2](../07/02.md)). Alternate translation: “nor my relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 4 23 vfv3 figs-idiom וּנְעָרַ֗י 1 As in [4:16](../04/16.md), this means “my servants.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ NEH 5 1 c3po figs-doublet אֲחֵיהֶ֖ם הַיְּהוּדִֽים 1
|
|||
NEH 5 2 u19u וְיֵשׁ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֹמְרִ֔ים 1 Verses 2, 3, 4, and 5 do not seem to be different complaints that people brought to Nehemiah separately. Rather, the whole group seems to be complaining that because they need to get food for their families, wealthier and more powerful Jews are exploiting them. They are forcing them to take mortgages and loans and even sell their children into slavery. Nehemiah is probably depicting one speaker after another in the crowd adding details to this picture. You could suggest this to the readers of your translation by introducing these comments with a translation such as, “some of them began to say”
|
||||
NEH 5 2 i9kn בָּנֵ֥ינוּ וּבְנֹתֵ֖ינוּ אֲנַ֣חְנוּ רַבִּ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “We have many children”
|
||||
NEH 5 2 i5cb figs-synecdoche וְנִקְחָ֥ה דָגָ֖ן 1 This does not mean only grain. The people complaining to Nehemiah are using one kind of food, grain, the staple of their diet, to refer figuratively to all the foods they would need to eat. Alternate translation: “we need food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 5 2 i7bq figs-explicit וְנִקְחָ֥ה דָגָ֖ן 1 The implication is that because the families are large, a lot of food is needed. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we need to get a lot of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 2 i7bq figs-explicit וְנִקְחָ֥ה דָגָ֖ן 1 The implication is that because the families are large, a lot of food is needed. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we need to get a lot of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 2 ojue figs-doublet וְנֹאכְלָ֥ה וְנִחְיֶֽה 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. The people use them together to emphasize the urgency and importance of having food. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “to get enough food to stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 5 3 hwfh figs-explicit וְיֵשׁ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֹמְרִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “Others added” (See the applicable note to [2:2](../02/02.md) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 3 dt2m translate-unknown שְׂדֹתֵ֛ינוּ וּכְרָמֵ֥ינוּ וּבָתֵּ֖ינוּ אֲנַ֣חְנוּ עֹרְבִ֑ים וְנִקְחָ֥ה דָגָ֖ן בָּרָעָֽב 1 It might be helpful to explain to your readers what a **mortgage** is, if you think they might not know. Alternate translation: “We have had to promise to give someone our fields, vineyards, and houses if we do not pay back the money we borrowed. We had to borrow the money to buy food during this time when food is scarce.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ NEH 5 5 oguf וְהִנֵּ֣ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the a
|
|||
NEH 5 5 rdp9 figs-explicit אֲנַ֣חְנוּ כֹ֠בְשִׁים אֶת־בָּנֵ֨ינוּ וְאֶת־בְּנֹתֵ֜ינוּ לַעֲבָדִ֗ים וְיֵ֨שׁ מִבְּנֹתֵ֤ינוּ נִכְבָּשׁוֹת֙ 1 In this context, the construction **are putting** likely indicates that the poor are on the verge of selling their children into slavery. The next sentence shows that they have already done this in some instances. It appears that in this culture, in dire situations, girls were sold before boys, perhaps because they could become either domestic servants or concubines. A concubine was a woman who was both a slave and a secondary wife to her master. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this statement that way. Alternate translation: “We are on the verge of selling our children into slavery. In fact, we have already sold some of our daughters as servants and concubines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 5 z783 grammar-connect-logic-result וְאֵ֣ין לְאֵ֣ל יָדֵ֔נוּ וּשְׂדֹתֵ֥ינוּ וּכְרָמֵ֖ינוּ לַאֲחֵרִֽים 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases because the second phrase gives the reason why the first phrase is true. Alternate translation: “because our creditors took the fields and vineyards we pledged as security for loans, there is nothing else we can do in this situation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 5 5 y2mq figs-idiom וְאֵ֣ין לְאֵ֣ל יָדֵ֔נוּ 1 **There is nothing to God in our hand** is an idiom that means that the speaker does not have the power to do what they are describing. Alternate translation: “there is nothing else we can do in this situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 5 5 jr7j figs-explicit וּשְׂדֹתֵ֥ינוּ וּכְרָמֵ֖ינוּ לַאֲחֵרִֽים 1 The implication is that when the poor could not pay back their loans, their creditors took the fields and vineyards they had pledged as collateral. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because our creditors took the fields and vineyards we pledged as security for loans.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 5 jr7j figs-explicit וּשְׂדֹתֵ֥ינוּ וּכְרָמֵ֖ינוּ לַאֲחֵרִֽים 1 The implication is that when the poor could not pay back their loans, their creditors took the fields and vineyards they had pledged as collateral. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because our creditors took the fields and vineyards we pledged as security for loans.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 6 xcm3 figs-metaphor וַיִּ֥חַר לִ֖י מְאֹ֑ד 1 Here Nehemiah says that his anger was a fire that burned inside of him. Alternate translation: “I got very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 5 6 ryx1 figs-abstractnouns כַּאֲשֶׁ֤ר שָׁמַ֨עְתִּי֙ אֶת־זַֽעֲקָתָ֔ם וְאֵ֖ת הַדְּבָרִ֥ים הָאֵֽלֶּה 1 **Outcry** is an abstract noun that refers to complaints that the poorer Jews made to Nehemiah about how the wealthier and more powerful Jews were treating them. You can translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “complain.” Alternate translation: “when I heard how they were complaining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 5 6 some figs-doublet אֶת־זַֽעֲקָתָ֔ם וְאֵ֖ת הַדְּבָרִ֥ים הָאֵֽלֶּה 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize the urgency and severity of these complaints. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “everything that they were complaining about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -519,12 +519,12 @@ NEH 5 7 wxyz figs-metaphor וַיִּמָּלֵ֨ךְ לִבִּ֜י עָ
|
|||
NEH 5 7 jawz וָאָרִ֨יבָה֙ 1 **Contended** is a technical term that means “to bring charges.” It means to initiate a lawsuit that would require the defendants to answer for themselves publicly, in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I brought charges”
|
||||
NEH 5 7 o23t הַחֹרִ֣ים…הַסְּגָנִ֔ים 1 See how you translated these terms in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens and the city officials”
|
||||
NEH 5 7 dy73 figs-idiom מַשָּׁ֥א…אַתֶּ֣ם נֹשִׁ֑ים 1 This expression means to charge interest when loaning money to another person. Alternate translation: “You are charging interest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 5 7 sn56 figs-explicit מַשָּׁ֥א אִישׁ־בְּאָחִ֖יו 1 The Law of Moses specifically forbade charging interest on a loan to a fellow Jew. So this was not just an exploitive business practice, it was a violation of God’s Law. The rich and powerful Jews would certainly have been expected to know this. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are charging interest on loans to your fellow Jews. You know that is forbidden in the Law of Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 7 sn56 figs-explicit מַשָּׁ֥א אִישׁ־בְּאָחִ֖יו 1 The Law of Moses specifically forbade charging interest on a loan to a fellow Jew. So this was not just an exploitive business practice, it was a violation of God’s Law. The rich and powerful Jews would certainly have been expected to know this. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are charging interest on loans to your fellow Jews. You know that is forbidden in the Law of Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 7 f66g figs-idiom אִישׁ־בְּאָחִ֖יו 1 In this context, “a man” means “each person.” It does not mean only an adult male. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 5 7 yibe figs-metaphor אִישׁ־בְּאָחִ֖יו 1 Here, **brother** could conceivably include even biological brothers, but in context it likely refers figuratively to fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “to your fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 5 7 r7yl translate-unknown וָאֶתֵּ֥ן עֲלֵיהֶ֖ם קְהִלָּ֥ה גְדוֹלָֽה 1 This means that, as part of conducting the lawsuit against these wealthy and powerful Jews, Nehemiah brought together a large group of their fellow citizens to hear the charges against them. This group was the “assembly.” Alternate translation: “I put them on trial in front of their fellow citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
NEH 5 7 u9u2 figs-events וָאֶתֵּ֥ן עֲלֵיהֶ֖ם קְהִלָּ֥ה גְדוֹלָֽה 1 To present the events in chronological order, if that would be helpful to your readers, you could put this before the previous sentence, which describes the first charge that Nehemiah brought at this trial. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 o7o9 figs-explicit אֲנַ֣חְנוּ קָ֠נִינוּ 1 **We** likely means Nehemiah and his relatives, as in 4:23. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I have bought back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 o7o9 figs-explicit אֲנַ֣חְנוּ קָ֠נִינוּ 1 **We** likely means Nehemiah and his relatives, as in 4:23. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I have bought back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 a1b2 figs-events קָ֠נִינוּ אֶת־אַחֵ֨ינוּ הַיְּהוּדִ֜ים הַנִּמְכָּרִ֤ים לַגּוֹיִם֙ 1 To present the events in chronological order, if that would be helpful to your readers, you could put the information that some Jews had to sell themselves into slavery before the information that Nehemiah and his relatives bought their freedom. Alternate translation: “Whenever our Jewish relatives have had to sell themselves into slavery to people from other nations … we have been buying them back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 o6o8 כְּדֵ֣י בָ֔נוּ 1 Alternate translation: “to the best of our ability”
|
||||
NEH 5 8 q123 figs-doublet אַחֵ֨ינוּ הַיְּהוּדִ֜ים 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize that buying them back was an honorable and expected action. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “our Jewish relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ NEH 5 8 t5y7 figs-activepassive הַיְּהוּדִ֜ים הַנִּמְ
|
|||
NEH 5 8 pzy8 figs-explicit וְגַם־אַתֶּ֛ם תִּמְכְּר֥וּ אֶת־אֲחֵיכֶ֖ם וְנִמְכְּרוּ־לָ֑נוּ 1 This means that they are selling their family members, both men and women, as slaves to their fellow Jews. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Now you are selling your own people to be slaves of your fellow Jews, so that they might later sell them back to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 kn82 figs-activepassive הַנִּמְכָּרִ֤ים לַגּוֹיִם֙ 1 This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “who people had sold as slaves to the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 b1a1 וְגַם־אַתֶּ֛ם 1 Malkijah This is an emphatic expression. Nehemiah uses it to show how serious the offense is. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate this emphasis in some way in your translation. Alternate translation: “you are actually”
|
||||
NEH 5 8 b1a3 figs-explicit תִּמְכְּר֥וּ אֶת־אֲחֵיכֶ֖ם 1 This means that the creditors were selling the debtors into slavery to recover the money they owed. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are actually selling your fellow Jews into slavery to get back the money they owe you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 b1a3 figs-explicit תִּמְכְּר֥וּ אֶת־אֲחֵיכֶ֖ם 1 This means that the creditors were selling the debtors into slavery to recover the money they owed. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are actually selling your fellow Jews into slavery to get back the money they owe you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 b1a5 figs-metaphor אֲחֵיכֶ֖ם 1 Here, **brother** likely refers figuratively to fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “your fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 b1a7 figs-activepassive וְנִמְכְּרוּ־לָ֑נוּ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “They are some of the very people we have been buying back!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 5 8 b1a9 figs-explicit וַֽיַּחֲרִ֔ישׁוּ וְלֹ֥א מָצְא֖וּ דָּבָֽר 1 The implication is that the accused said nothing because they knew that Nehemiah’s charges were true. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They knew that these charges were true, so they were silent. They could not answer a single word.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ NEH 5 9 b1b3 מֵחֶרְפַּ֖ת הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אוֹיְבֵֽ
|
|||
NEH 5 9 s7qt figs-abstractnouns מֵחֶרְפַּ֖ת הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אוֹיְבֵֽינוּ 1 **Reproach** is an abstract noun that refers to the way the enemies of the Jews were mocking them. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the same idea with a verb such as “mock.” Alternate translation: “to keep the nations who are our enemies from mocking us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 5 9 b1b5 figs-doublet הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אוֹיְבֵֽינוּ 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize the identity and hostility of the people who are opposing the Jews. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 5 10 b1b7 figs-metaphor וְגַם־אֲנִי֙ אַחַ֣י וּנְעָרַ֔י 1 As in [4:23](../04/23.md), this means, “I myself, my relatives, and my servants.” The term “brother” here likely includes one or more of Nehemiah’s biological brothers, but more generally it refers figuratively to his close relatives. Alternate translation: “I myself, my relatives, and my servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 5 10 xbp5 figs-explicit נֹשִׁ֥ים בָּהֶ֖ם כֶּ֣סֶף וְדָגָ֑ן 1 The implication is that Nehemiah and his companions are lending without charging any interest. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have been lending money and grain to those in need without charging interest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 10 xbp5 figs-explicit נֹשִׁ֥ים בָּהֶ֖ם כֶּ֣סֶף וְדָגָ֑ן 1 The implication is that Nehemiah and his companions are lending without charging any interest. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have been lending money and grain to those in need without charging interest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 10 b1b9 figs-metonymy כֶּ֣סֶף 1 **Silver** here means “money.” Nehemiah is describing money figuratively by reference to the commodity that is being used as a means of exchange, silver. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 5 10 j3dq נַֽעַזְבָה־נָּ֖א אֶת־הַמַּשָּׁ֥א הַזֶּֽה 1 It is clear from the context that **us** in this sentence does not mean Nehemiah and his companions, but rather the entire Jewish community, of which they are a part. Nehemiah could say to the defendants, accusingly, “You must stop charging interest!” But he includes himself and the entire community as a way of being encouraging rather than condemning. (This would be a use of “we/us” that includes the addressees. You should make this clear in your translation if your language makes that distinction.) Alternate translation: “All of us should stop charging interest on loans.”
|
||||
NEH 5 11 vkz7 הָשִׁיבוּ֩ נָ֨א לָהֶ֜ם 1 This is worded as a polite request, but it is really a demand. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express it with an imperative. “Give them back”
|
||||
|
|
@ -555,16 +555,16 @@ NEH 5 11 b1c1 translate-fraction וּמְאַ֨ת 1 In this context, this ex
|
|||
NEH 5 11 e9y2 figs-metonymy הַכֶּ֤סֶף 1 **Silver** means “money” here, as in verse 10. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 5 11 b1c3 figs-idiom נֹשִׁ֥ים בָּהֶֽם 1 Alternate translation: “charging them” or “making them pay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 5 12 b1c5 וַיֹּאמְר֣וּ 1 **They** means the leading citizens and the city officials. Alternate translation: “These leaders replied”
|
||||
NEH 5 12 q7t5 figs-explicit נָשִׁ֗יב 1 The implication is that they will return the fields, vineyards, olive orchards, and houses that they took from the poor, as Nehemiah demanded in [5:11](../05/11.md). If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We will give back their fields, vineyards, olive orchards, and houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 12 q7t5 figs-explicit נָשִׁ֗יב 1 The implication is that they will return the fields, vineyards, olive orchards, and houses that they took from the poor, as Nehemiah demanded in [5:11](../05/11.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We will give back their fields, vineyards, olive orchards, and houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 12 i1gi וּמֵהֶם֙ לֹ֣א נְבַקֵּ֔שׁ 1 Alternate translation: “And we will stop charging them interest”
|
||||
NEH 5 12 e2yv grammar-connect-logic-result נַעֲשֶׂ֔ה כַּאֲשֶׁ֖ר אַתָּ֣ה אוֹמֵ֑ר 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put this statement first, since it is the reason for the results that follow, the return of property and the cancelling of interest. Alternate translation: “Yes, we will do what you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 5 12 b1c7 figs-explicit וָאֶקְרָא֙ אֶת־הַכֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים וָֽאַשְׁבִּיעֵ֔ם לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת כַּדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּֽה 1 The implication is that the priests would have these leaders swear an oath before God. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then I called the priests, and I made the leaders swear to God in front of them that they would do what they had promised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 12 b1c7 figs-explicit וָאֶקְרָא֙ אֶת־הַכֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים וָֽאַשְׁבִּיעֵ֔ם לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת כַּדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּֽה 1 The implication is that the priests would have these leaders swear an oath before God. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then I called the priests, and I made the leaders swear to God in front of them that they would do what they had promised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1c9 figs-metonymy חָצְנִ֣י נָעַ֗רְתִּי 1 **Bosom** here refers figuratively to Nehemiah’s robe. It refers specifically by association to the part that he could gather together in front of him to form a pouch. Alternate translation: “I shook out the folds of my robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 neg1 translate-symaction חָצְנִ֣י נָעַ֗רְתִּי 1 Nehemiah gathered his robe together in front of him, the way someone would if they wanted to carry something in its folds. Then he flung the robe open and shook it, so that anything that was in it would have scattered. By doing this, he demonstrated symbolically to the Jewish leaders what would happen to them if they broke the promise they made. Alternate translation: “I shook out the folds of my robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 f5p4 כָּ֣כָה יְנַעֵ֪ר הָֽאֱלֹהִ֟ים אֶת־כָּל־הָאִישׁ֩ אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹֽא־יָקִ֜ים אֶת־הַדָּבָ֣ר הַזֶּ֗ה מִבֵּיתוֹ֙ וּמִ֣יגִיע֔וֹ וְכָ֛כָה יִהְיֶ֥ה נָע֖וּר וָרֵ֑ק 1 Alternate translation: “In the same way, may God take away the home and all the possessions of anyone who does not keep this promise”
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1d1 figs-gendernotations כָּל־הָאִישׁ֩ 1 In this context, this expression means “anyone.” It could include women as well as men. Alternate translation: “anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1d3 figs-personification יָקִ֜ים אֶת־הַדָּבָ֣ר הַזֶּ֗ה 1 The **word** means the promise that the leaders have made and the oath they have taken to confirm it. Nehemiah is speaking of this promise figuratively as if it were a living thing that could stand, that is, stay in place rather than go away. Alternate translation: “keep this oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1d5 figs-doublet מִבֵּיתוֹ֙ וּמִ֣יגִיע֔וֹ 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to express the totality of what a person owns. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “everything he owns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1d5 figs-doublet מִבֵּיתוֹ֙ וּמִ֣יגִיע֔וֹ 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to express the totality of what a person owns. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “everything he owns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1d7 וּמִ֣יגִיע֔וֹ 1 **Labor** here figuratively refers to the “fruits of labor,” that is, the possessions that a person acquires through labor. Alternate translation: “all his possessions”
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1d9 figs-parallelism וְכָ֛כָה יִהְיֶ֥ה נָע֖וּר וָרֵ֑ק 1 This sentence repeats the meaning of the previous one. Nehemiah uses the repetition for emphasis. You would not need to use the same repetition in your translation if it were already clear that Nehemiah is speaking emphatically in the first sentence. However, you could also rephrase the meaning. Alternate translation: “Yes, may that person be separated from everything he owns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 5 13 b1e1 figs-doublet נָע֖וּר וָרֵ֑ק 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize how completely Nehemiah wants God to punish anyone who breaks the oath. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “be separated from everything he owns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ NEH 5 14 nqt2 figs-metaphor וְאַחַ֔י 1 As in [4:23](../04/23.md),
|
|||
NEH 5 15 uu9k figs-doublet וְהַפַּחוֹת֩ הָרִאשֹׁנִ֨ים אֲשֶׁר־לְפָנַ֜י 1 **Former** and **before my face** mean similar things. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “The men who were governors before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 5 15 b1g1 figs-synecdoche לְפָנַ֜י 1 Here **face** figuratively describes an entire person by reference to one part of them, the “face.” Alternate translation: “before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 5 15 b1g3 figs-metaphor הִכְבִּ֣ידוּ עַל־הָעָ֗ם 1 Here Nehemiah speaks figuratively as if these governors had been a great burden that the people were carrying, making their lives very difficult. Alternate translation: “made life very difficult for the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 5 15 b1g5 figs-explicit וַיִּקְח֨וּ מֵהֶ֜ם בְּלֶ֤חֶם וָיַ֨יִן֙ אַחַר֙ כֶּֽסֶף־שְׁקָלִ֣ים אַרְבָּעִ֔ים 1 **After** indicates that the supplies of bread and wine were in addition to the money. Nehemiah is likely describing what the former governors required of the people each day. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They demanded that they supply them with bread and wine and forty silver shekels every day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 15 b1g5 figs-explicit וַיִּקְח֨וּ מֵהֶ֜ם בְּלֶ֤חֶם וָיַ֨יִן֙ אַחַר֙ כֶּֽסֶף־שְׁקָלִ֣ים אַרְבָּעִ֔ים 1 **After** indicates that the supplies of bread and wine were in addition to the money. Nehemiah is likely describing what the former governors required of the people each day. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They demanded that they supply them with bread and wine and forty silver shekels every day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 15 w4zk translate-bmoney כֶּֽסֶף־שְׁקָלִ֣ים אַרְבָּעִ֔ים 1 In ancient times, a silver shekel weighed about 11 grams or about a third of an ounce. You could try to express this in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate over time, since those values can change from year to year. Instead, you could say something general like “40 silver coins,” or give the equivalent weight, or use the biblical term in the text and give the weight in a note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||||
NEH 5 15 b1g7 translate-numbers כֶּֽסֶף־שְׁקָלִ֣ים אַרְבָּעִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “forty silver shekels” or “40 pieces of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
NEH 5 15 b1g9 גַּ֥ם נַעֲרֵיהֶ֖ם שָׁלְט֣וּ עַל־הָעָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “Even their servants oppressed the people.”
|
||||
|
|
@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ NEH 5 15 b1h1 figs-metaphor מִפְּנֵ֖י יִרְאַ֥ת אֱלֹהִ
|
|||
NEH 5 16 gx42 figs-metaphor בִּמְלֶ֜אכֶת הַחוֹמָ֤ה הַזֹּאת֙ הֶחֱזַ֔קְתִּי 1 Nehemiah describes himself figuratively as **holding fast to**, meaning “holding onto,” the work of rebuilding the wall. This means that he was devoted to it, and he did not pursue other interests, including ones that could have made money for him. Alternate translation: “I devoted myself to the work of rebuilding of the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 5 16 lm7t וְשָׂדֶ֖ה לֹ֣א קָנִ֑ינוּ 1 **We** likely refers to Nehemiah and his relatives, since he mentions his servants next.
|
||||
NEH 5 16 b1h3 figs-synecdoche וְשָׂדֶ֖ה לֹ֣א קָנִ֑ינוּ 1 Nehemiah is using the term **field** figuratively to describe any kind of real property that he and his relatives might have bought. Verse 11 shows that this could have included not just fields but also things like vineyards, olive orchards, and houses. He is describing all real property by reference to one kind, a field. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I did not buy any property” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 5 16 m3s9 figs-explicit וְשָׂדֶ֖ה לֹ֣א קָנִ֑ינוּ 1 The implication is that they could have bought property cheaply because the poor were so desperate. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I did not buy any property, even though we could have gotten it cheaply because the poor were so desperate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 16 m3s9 figs-explicit וְשָׂדֶ֖ה לֹ֣א קָנִ֑ינוּ 1 The implication is that they could have bought property cheaply because the poor were so desperate. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I did not buy any property, even though we could have gotten it cheaply because the poor were so desperate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 5 16 xpb3 figs-activepassive וְכָל־נְעָרַ֔י קְבוּצִ֥ים שָׁ֖ם עַל־הַמְּלָאכָֽה 1 **There** means at the wall, and **for the work** means the work of rebuilding the wall. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I gathered all of my servants there to work on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 5 17 j2af figs-synecdoche וְהַיְּהוּדִ֨ים 1 While this expression means “the Jewish people” in most of the book, in the context here and in 2:16 it seems to mean “Jewish leaders.” Nehemiah is describing some members of this people group, its leaders, as if they were the whole group. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 5 17 a1g4 translate-unknown וְהַסְּגָנִ֜ים 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “city officials” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ NEH 5 17 w7i4 figs-explicit וְהַבָּאִ֥ים אֵלֵ֛ינוּ
|
|||
NEH 5 18 fa32 figs-ellipsis וַאֲשֶׁר֩ הָיָ֨ה נַעֲשֶׂ֜ה לְי֣וֹם אֶחָ֗ד שׁ֣וֹר אֶחָ֞ד צֹ֠אן שֵׁשׁ־בְּרֻר֤וֹת וְצִפֳּרִים֙ נַֽעֲשׂוּ־לִ֔י 1 Nehemiah seems once again to be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. He probably means something like, “What was prepared for one day is as follows: One bull, six choice sheep, and birds; that is what was prepared for me.” You could simplify the sentence for your readers by not including “were prepared for me” again at the end. Alternate translation: “Each day I told my servants to prepare one ox, six good sheep, and various kinds of poultry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
NEH 5 18 gqe2 figs-activepassive וַאֲשֶׁר֩ הָיָ֨ה נַעֲשֶׂ֜ה לְי֣וֹם אֶחָ֗ד 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Each day I told my servants to prepare” or “Each day I told my servants to serve us the meat from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 5 18 sp6n translate-unknown וְצִפֳּרִים֙ 1 It is likely that the birds were domesticated rather than wild, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term that indicates this. Alternate translation: “and various kinds of poultry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
NEH 5 18 b1h5 figs-ellipsis וּבֵ֨ין עֲשֶׂ֧רֶת יָמִ֛ים בְּכָל־יַ֖יִן לְהַרְבֵּ֑ה 1 Nehemiah is once again leaving out some words that a sentence would ordinarily need to be complete. To make things clearer for your readers, you express the meaning more fully. Alternate translation: “Every ten days I also had my servants bring in an abundant supply of various kinds of wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
NEH 5 18 b1h5 figs-ellipsis וּבֵ֨ין עֲשֶׂ֧רֶת יָמִ֛ים בְּכָל־יַ֖יִן לְהַרְבֵּ֑ה 1 Nehemiah is once again leaving out some words that a sentence would ordinarily need to be complete. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you express the meaning more fully. Alternate translation: “Every ten days I also had my servants bring in an abundant supply of various kinds of wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
NEH 5 18 mil3 figs-idiom וּבֵ֨ין עֲשֶׂ֧רֶת יָמִ֛ים 1 This expression means “every ten days.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 5 18 b1h7 יַ֖יִן לְהַרְבֵּ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “enough wine for everyone”
|
||||
NEH 5 18 b1h9 וְעִם־זֶ֗ה לֶ֤חֶם הַפֶּחָה֙ לֹ֣א בִקַּ֔שְׁתִּי 1 As in [5:14](../05/14.md), “the bread of the governor” means “the governor’s food allowance.” The implication is that, at his own expense, Nehemiah paid for all of the things he has just described. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I paid for all of these things at my own expense. I did not accept the governor’s food allowance”
|
||||
|
|
@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ NEH 6 2 n5nu וַיִּשְׁלַ֨ח…אֵלַ֣י 1 Alternate transla
|
|||
NEH 6 2 c1a9 לְכָ֞ה וְנִֽוָּעֲדָ֥ה יַחְדָּ֛ו 1 These enemies use the word **come** to encourage Nehemiah to accept their invitation. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the word as something other than an imperative to make the message sound inviting. Alternate translation: “We would like to arrange to meet with you”
|
||||
NEH 6 2 rbv9 translate-names בַּכְּפִירִ֖ים בְּבִקְעַ֣ת אוֹנ֑וֹ 1 Ono is the name of a place about twenty miles from Jerusalem. It is down from the mountains towards the Mediterranean coast, so it can be described as a “valley” or “plain.” Alternate translation: “in one of the villages in the plain of Ono” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 6 2 c1b1 figs-idiom וְהֵ֨מָּה֙ חֹֽשְׁבִ֔ים לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת לִ֖י רָעָֽה 1 In this context, **evil** means “harm.” Alternate translation: “they wanted to harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 6 2 c1b3 figs-explicit וְהֵ֨מָּה֙ חֹֽשְׁבִ֔ים לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת לִ֖י רָעָֽה 1 The implication is that Nehemiah figured this out even though in their invitation these enemies pretended to be sincere. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But I recognized that they were saying this because they wanted to harm me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 2 c1b3 figs-explicit וְהֵ֨מָּה֙ חֹֽשְׁבִ֔ים לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת לִ֖י רָעָֽה 1 The implication is that Nehemiah figured this out even though in their invitation these enemies pretended to be sincere. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But I recognized that they were saying this because they wanted to harm me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 3 d84v figs-synecdoche מְלָאכָ֤ה גְדוֹלָה֙ אֲנִ֣י עֹשֶׂ֔ה 1 Nehemiah is once again using himself to represent the whole community and its work of rebuilding of the wall. Alternate translation: “We are doing a great work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
NEH 6 3 c1b5 וְלֹ֥א אוּכַ֖ל לָרֶ֑דֶת 1 Nehemiah does not mean that he is physically unable to travel to Ono. He means that he cannot leave his supervision of the work for the several days it would take to travel there and back. Alternate translation: “I am not able to travel while it is going on”
|
||||
NEH 6 3 c1b7 לָרֶ֑דֶת 1 Nehemiah uses the word **down** because the plain of Ono is at a lower elevation than Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “meet with you”
|
||||
|
|
@ -641,12 +641,12 @@ NEH 6 5 s6ag וְאִגֶּ֥רֶת פְּתוּחָ֖ה בְּיָדֽ
|
|||
NEH 6 5 c1c5 figs-explicit וְאִגֶּ֥רֶת פְּתוּחָ֖ה בְּיָדֽוֹ 1 As a diplomatic communication, the letter should have been sealed. Because it was not, others could read it and spread its contents among the people of the region. It appears that Sanballat deliberately left the letter unsealed to pressure Nehemiah to meet with him. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Sanballat left the letter unsealed so that others would find out what it said, because he wanted to pressure me to meet with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 rx5j figs-activepassive כָּת֣וּב בָּ֗הּ 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The letter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 wy84 figs-activepassive בַּגּוֹיִ֤ם נִשְׁמָע֙ 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The rumor in the region is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 c1c7 figs-explicit וְגַשְׁמ֣וּ אֹמֵ֔ר 1 The claim appears to be that Geshem has investigated these rumors and told Sanballat that they are true. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and Geshem confirms that it is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 c1c9 translate-names וְגַשְׁמ֣וּ 1 **Gashmu** here is an alternate form of the name **Geshem** found in [6:1](../06/01.md). To make things clearer for your readers, you can translate the name as **Geshem** here as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 z81q figs-explicit אַתָּ֤ה וְהַיְּהוּדִים֙ חֹשְׁבִ֣ים לִמְר֔וֹד עַל־כֵּ֛ן אַתָּ֥ה בוֹנֶ֖ה הַחוֹמָ֑ה 1 This means specifically that the Jews would rebel against Artaxerxes, the Persian king, who was currently ruling them. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you and the Jewish people are rebuilding the wall because you are planning to rebel against King Artaxerxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 c1c7 figs-explicit וְגַשְׁמ֣וּ אֹמֵ֔ר 1 The claim appears to be that Geshem has investigated these rumors and told Sanballat that they are true. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and Geshem confirms that it is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 c1c9 translate-names וְגַשְׁמ֣וּ 1 **Gashmu** here is an alternate form of the name **Geshem** found in [6:1](../06/01.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can translate the name as **Geshem** here as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 z81q figs-explicit אַתָּ֤ה וְהַיְּהוּדִים֙ חֹשְׁבִ֣ים לִמְר֔וֹד עַל־כֵּ֛ן אַתָּ֥ה בוֹנֶ֖ה הַחוֹמָ֑ה 1 This means specifically that the Jews would rebel against Artaxerxes, the Persian king, who was currently ruling them. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you and the Jewish people are rebuilding the wall because you are planning to rebel against King Artaxerxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 6 c1d1 וְהַיְּהוּדִים֙ 1 Here this expression means **the Jewish people** specifically the ones living in Judah and Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people”
|
||||
NEH 6 6 c1d3 וְאַתָּ֗ה הֹוֶ֤ה לָהֶם֙ לְמֶ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “They are also saying that you intend to make yourself the king of the Jews”
|
||||
NEH 6 7 n1rj grammar-connect-words-phrases וְגַם 1 This phrase indicates that what follows is more of the report that Sanballat claims he is hearing from the people in the surrounding countries. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could put something in your translation to indicate this. Alternate translation: “These people are also saying that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
|
||||
NEH 6 7 n1rj grammar-connect-words-phrases וְגַם 1 This phrase indicates that what follows is more of the report that Sanballat claims he is hearing from the people in the surrounding countries. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put something in your translation to indicate this. Alternate translation: “These people are also saying that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
|
||||
NEH 6 7 u185 נְבִיאִ֡ים הֶעֱמַ֣דְתָּ לִקְרֹא֩ עָלֶ֨יךָ בִֽירוּשָׁלִַ֜ם 1 Alternate translation: “you have appointed prophets to make this proclamation about you in Jerusalem”
|
||||
NEH 6 7 c1d5 לֵאמֹ֗ר מֶ֚לֶךְ בִּֽיהוּדָ֔ה 1 The proclamation can be presented as a direct quotation. “Saying” can be represented by the quotation marks and whatever punctuation your language uses to introduce a quotation. Alternate translation: “The Jews now have a king of their own”
|
||||
NEH 6 7 c1d7 וְעַתָּה֙ 1 This is not a reference to time. Sanballat is using this expression to introduce a further inference. Alternate translation: “certainly”
|
||||
|
|
@ -658,11 +658,11 @@ NEH 6 8 ei6j וָאֶשְׁלְחָ֤ה אֵלָיו֙ 1 Alternate tr
|
|||
NEH 6 8 ab7x figs-activepassive לֹ֤א נִֽהְיָה֙ כַּדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַתָּ֣ה אוֹמֵ֑ר 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I have not done any of the things you have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 6 8 ds1y figs-metaphor כִּ֥י מִֽלִּבְּךָ֖ אַתָּ֥ה בוֹדָֽאם 1 Here, the **heart** figuratively represents someone’s thoughts and feelings. Sanballat’s thoughts and feelings, in turn, represent him as a person. Alternate translation: “you have made all this up in your own imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 6 8 c1e7 grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּ֥י 1 This term expresses a contrast between the clause that comes before and the clause that comes after. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 p45k figs-explicit כִּ֣י כֻלָּ֗ם מְיָֽרְאִ֤ים אוֹתָ֨נוּ֙ 1 This likely means, “they were all trying to frighten us.” The implication is that Nehemiah recognized that this was the motive behind the letters. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I knew that they were all just trying to frighten us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 p45k figs-explicit כִּ֣י כֻלָּ֗ם מְיָֽרְאִ֤ים אוֹתָ֨נוּ֙ 1 This likely means, “they were all trying to frighten us.” The implication is that Nehemiah recognized that this was the motive behind the letters. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I knew that they were all just trying to frighten us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 c1e9 לֵאמֹ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “They were thinking”
|
||||
NEH 6 9 b5ij figs-metaphor יִרְפּ֧וּ יְדֵיהֶ֛ם מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 Here, **hand** figuratively represents strength, power, control, or action. Alternate translation: “The workers will stop doing the work on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 c1f1 figs-explicit יִרְפּ֧וּ יְדֵיהֶ֛ם מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 The implication is that the enemies expected the Jews to become so afraid of being accused of rebelling for rebuilding the wall that they would stop doing that. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jews will become so afraid that they will stop working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 c1f3 figs-explicit מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 This means specifically the work on the wall. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 c1f1 figs-explicit יִרְפּ֧וּ יְדֵיהֶ֛ם מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 The implication is that the enemies expected the Jews to become so afraid of being accused of rebelling for rebuilding the wall that they would stop doing that. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jews will become so afraid that they will stop working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 c1f3 figs-explicit מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 This means specifically the work on the wall. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 c1f5 figs-activepassive וְלֹ֣א תֵעָשֶׂ֑ה 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “they will never finish rebuilding it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 j1dj figs-aside וְעַתָּ֖ה חַזֵּ֥ק אֶת־יָדָֽי 1 Nehemiah speaks directly to God once again here. This instance is like the one in [4:4](../04/04.md), where Nehemiah records what he prayed at the time of the events he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this by introducing the prayer with a phrase such as “so I prayed,” by presenting the prayer as a direct quotation, and by having Nehemiah address God directly at the beginning. Alternate translation: “So I prayed, ‘O God, give me courage’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
|
||||
NEH 6 9 c1f7 figs-metaphor חַזֵּ֥ק אֶת־יָדָֽי 1 Here the strength of a person’s hands figuratively stands for the courage they are feeling inside. Alternate translation: “strengthen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ NEH 6 10 c1f9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַאֲנִי 1 Nehemiah us
|
|||
NEH 6 10 c1g1 בָ֗אתִי בֵּ֣ית 1 Alternate translation: “I went to visit”
|
||||
NEH 6 10 ybj6 translate-names שְֽׁמַֽעְיָ֧ה בֶן־דְּלָיָ֛ה בֶּן־מְהֵֽיטַבְאֵ֖ל 1 Shemaiah is the name of a man, Delaiah is the name of his father, and Mehetabel is the name of his grandfather. Alternate translation: “Shemaiah, the son of Delaiah and grandson of Mehetabel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 6 10 k8xd figs-activepassive וְה֣וּא עָצ֑וּר 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he was not leaving his house.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 6 10 c1g3 translate-symaction וְה֣וּא עָצ֑וּר 1 Nehemiah does not say why Shemaiah was not leaving his house. He could have been sick or he could have been ceremonially unclean, so you might choose not to specify any reason. However, the context suggests that Shemaiah may have been trying to symbolize that it was not safe for Jewish leaders to go around in public. A man by the name of Shemaiah is listed in [10:8](../10/08.md) as one of the priests who signed the community agreement. This could be the same person since he has access to the temple and is therefore likely a priest. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could suggest this reason explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was a priest, and he was trying to show that it was not safe for Jewish leaders to go out in public, so he was not leaving his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
NEH 6 10 c1g3 translate-symaction וְה֣וּא עָצ֑וּר 1 Nehemiah does not say why Shemaiah was not leaving his house. He could have been sick or he could have been ceremonially unclean, so you might choose not to specify any reason. However, the context suggests that Shemaiah may have been trying to symbolize that it was not safe for Jewish leaders to go around in public. A man by the name of Shemaiah is listed in [10:8](../10/08.md) as one of the priests who signed the community agreement. This could be the same person since he has access to the temple and is therefore likely a priest. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could suggest this reason explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was a priest, and he was trying to show that it was not safe for Jewish leaders to go out in public, so he was not leaving his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
NEH 6 10 c1g5 figs-explicit נִוָּעֵד֩ אֶל־בֵּ֨ית הָאֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־תּ֣וֹךְ הַֽהֵיכָ֗ל 1 Shemaiah seems to be proposing that he and Nehemiah move their meeting to the temple, suggesting that they are not even safe in his house. Alternate translation: “We are not safe even here. We need to go into the temple, to the sacred place inside the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 10 c1g7 figs-parallelism אֶל־בֵּ֨ית הָאֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־תּ֣וֹךְ הַֽהֵיכָ֗ל 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Shemaiah uses the repetition to emphasize the danger he is suggesting they are in. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “into the temple” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 6 10 c1g9 figs-metaphor בֵּ֨ית הָאֱלֹהִ֜ים 1 Shemaiah is referring to the temple figuratively as the “house of God,” as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -683,7 +683,7 @@ NEH 6 11 c1h8 figs-rquestion וּמִ֥י כָמ֛וֹנִי אֲשֶׁר
|
|||
NEH 6 11 c1i0 figs-explicit וּמִ֥י כָמ֛וֹנִי אֲשֶׁר־יָב֥וֹא אֶל־הַהֵיכָ֖ל וָחָ֑י 1 It is not entirely clear what Nehemiah means by this. He could be saying that he should not go into the temple because he is not a priest. However, the Bible records instances of other people who were not priests going into the temple to seek sanctuary. So Nehemiah may be saying instead that because he is the governor he is too well known to escape from assassins by hiding in the temple. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Besides, I am the governor, and everyone knows me, so I could not save my life by trying to hide in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 11 c1i3 לֹ֖א אָבֽוֹא 1 Alternate translation: “I refuse to do it!”
|
||||
NEH 6 12 c1i5 וָאַכִּ֕ירָה וְהִנֵּ֥ה 1 The term “behold” is used to focus attention on the words that follow. Within this episode as a whole, it creates the impression of Nehemiah suddenly realizing something that had not been clear to him before. Alternate translation: “All of a sudden I realized”
|
||||
NEH 6 12 c1i7 figs-explicit לֹֽא־אֱלֹהִ֖ים שְׁלָח֑וֹ 1 Shemaiah seems to have been pretending that God had revealed to him prophetically that people would be coming secretly at night to kill Nehemiah. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had not given Shemaiah a prophetic message for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 12 c1i7 figs-explicit לֹֽא־אֱלֹהִ֖ים שְׁלָח֑וֹ 1 Shemaiah seems to have been pretending that God had revealed to him prophetically that people would be coming secretly at night to kill Nehemiah. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had not given Shemaiah a prophetic message for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 12 s2sf כִּ֤י הַנְּבוּאָה֙ דִּבֶּ֣ר עָלַ֔י וְטוֹבִיָּ֥ה וְסַנְבַלַּ֖ט שְׂכָרֽוֹ 1 Alternate translation: “Instead, he was saying these things to hinder my work because Tobiah and Sanballat had paid him to say them”
|
||||
NEH 6 13 c1i9 grammar-connect-logic-result לְמַ֤עַן שָׂכוּר֙ ה֔וּא לְמַֽעַן־אִירָ֥א 1 This is the reason why Nehemiah’s enemies had hired Shemaiah; because they wanted to cause Nehemiah to be afraid. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The reason they had hired him was to scare me. They hoped that as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 6 13 c1j1 grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֤עַן 1 This term introduces the purpose for the sentence contained in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -710,15 +710,15 @@ NEH 6 16 c1l3 figs-activepassive מֵאֵ֣ת אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ נֶ
|
|||
NEH 6 17 c1l5 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous גַּ֣ם ׀ בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ם 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce something else that was happening at the same time as the other events he has just described. Alternate translation: “During this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
|
||||
NEH 6 17 c1l7 figs-idiom בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ם 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 6 17 c1l9 חֹרֵ֤י יְהוּדָה֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens of Judah”
|
||||
NEH 6 17 zw37 figs-explicit מַרְבִּ֞ים…אִגְּרֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם 1 The implication is these citizens were sending information to Tobiah about Nehemiah. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sent many messengers with letters to Tobiah to give him information about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 17 zw37 figs-explicit מַרְבִּ֞ים…אִגְּרֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם 1 The implication is these citizens were sending information to Tobiah about Nehemiah. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sent many messengers with letters to Tobiah to give him information about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 17 rx81 figs-personification וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר לְטוֹבִיָּ֖ה בָּא֥וֹת אֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 Here Nehemiah speaks of Tobiah’s letters as if they could come on their own to the people he was answering. Alternate translation: “Tobiah sent letters” or “Tobiah sent many messengers with letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
NEH 6 17 c1m1 figs-explicit וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר לְטוֹבִיָּ֖ה בָּא֥וֹת אֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 The implication is that Tobiah was sending back instructions to his allies. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah sent many messengers with letters back to them with instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 17 c1m1 figs-explicit וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר לְטוֹבִיָּ֖ה בָּא֥וֹת אֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 The implication is that Tobiah was sending back instructions to his allies. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah sent many messengers with letters back to them with instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 17 rcx8 translate-names טוֹבִיָּ֑ה 1 This is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 z2uq figs-idiom כִּי־רַבִּ֣ים בִּֽיהוּדָ֗ה בַּעֲלֵ֤י שְׁבוּעָה֙ ל֔וֹ 1 This means that many Judeans were “owners of oaths” to Tobiah. That is, they had sworn oaths to be loyal to him. Alternate translation: “Many people in Judah had sworn an oath to be loyal to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 c1m3 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־רַבִּ֣ים בִּֽיהוּדָ֗ה בַּעֲלֵ֤י שְׁבוּעָה֙ ל֔וֹ 1 You can put this information last in the verse because it is a result, and the rest of the verse gives the reason why the people swore these oaths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 c1m5 figs-explicit כִּי־חָתָ֥ן ה֖וּא לִשְׁכַנְיָ֣ה בֶן־אָרַ֑ח 1 This statement means that Tobiah was married to the daughter of Shecaniah. The implication is that Shecaniah was a powerful and influential member of the community. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah was married to the daughter of a powerful and influential member of the community, Shecaniah the son of Arah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 c1m5 figs-explicit כִּי־חָתָ֥ן ה֖וּא לִשְׁכַנְיָ֣ה בֶן־אָרַ֑ח 1 This statement means that Tobiah was married to the daughter of Shecaniah. The implication is that Shecaniah was a powerful and influential member of the community. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah was married to the daughter of a powerful and influential member of the community, Shecaniah the son of Arah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 rn1q translate-names לִשְׁכַנְיָ֣ה בֶן־אָרַ֑ח 1 Shecaniah is the name of a man, and Arah is the name of his father. This is probably the same Shecaniah who is mentioned in 3:29. See how you translated his name there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 c1m7 figs-explicit וִֽיהוֹחָנָ֣ן בְּנ֔וֹ לָקַ֕ח אֶת־בַּת־מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם בֶּ֥ן בֶּֽרֶכְיָֽה 1 The implication is that Meshullam was another powerful and influential member of the community. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah’s son Jehohanan was married to the daughter of another powerful and influential man, Meshullam the son of Berechiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 c1m7 figs-explicit וִֽיהוֹחָנָ֣ן בְּנ֔וֹ לָקַ֕ח אֶת־בַּת־מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם בֶּ֥ן בֶּֽרֶכְיָֽה 1 The implication is that Meshullam was another powerful and influential member of the community. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah’s son Jehohanan was married to the daughter of another powerful and influential man, Meshullam the son of Berechiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 id1x translate-names וִֽיהוֹחָנָ֣ן 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 6 18 c1m9 בְּנ֔וֹ 1 **His** means that Jehohanan was the son of Tobiah.
|
||||
NEH 6 18 c1n1 לָקַ֕ח אֶת־בַּת 1 Alternate translation: “was married to the daughter of”
|
||||
|
|
@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ NEH 7 2 dx6d figs-idiom וְיָרֵ֥א אֶת־הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים מ
|
|||
NEH 7 3 y2jk figs-activepassive לֹ֣א יִפָּֽתְח֞וּ שַׁעֲרֵ֤י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not order the gates of Jerusalem to be opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 7 3 n55g figs-explicit לֹ֣א יִפָּֽתְח֞וּ שַׁעֲרֵ֤י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ 1 Hanani and Hananiah would not have opened the gates physically themselves. Rather, they would have ordered this to be done. Alternate translation: “Do not order the gates of Jerusalem to be opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 7 3 w3hi figs-metonymy עַד־חֹ֣ם הַשֶּׁ֔מֶשׁ 1 Here Nehemiah probably uses the heat of the sun to represent the light of the sun. His intent is to open the gates some time after the sun rises regardless of how hot the sun shines on any particular day. Alternate translation: “until broad daylight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 7 3 ed9m figs-explicit עַד־חֹ֣ם הַשֶּׁ֔מֶשׁ 1 The implication is that the gatekeepers should not open the gates at sunrise, as would have been customary, because the enemies of the Jews could launch a surprise attack in the dim light before most of the city was up and ready for the day. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “until broad daylight. That way we will be able to see anything our enemies are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 7 3 ed9m figs-explicit עַד־חֹ֣ם הַשֶּׁ֔מֶשׁ 1 The implication is that the gatekeepers should not open the gates at sunrise, as would have been customary, because the enemies of the Jews could launch a surprise attack in the dim light before most of the city was up and ready for the day. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “until broad daylight. That way we will be able to see anything our enemies are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 7 3 b2es וְעַ֨ד הֵ֥ם עֹמְדִ֛ים יָגִ֥יפוּ הַדְּלָת֖וֹת וֶאֱחֹ֑זוּ 1 **They** means the gatekeepers, and “standing” means keeping guard. Alternate translation: “Order the doors to be shut and locked while the gatekeepers are still on guard”
|
||||
NEH 7 3 mir9 figs-idiom וְהַעֲמֵ֗יד מִשְׁמְרוֹת֙ יֹשְׁבֵ֣י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֔ם אִ֚ישׁ בְּמִשְׁמָר֔וֹ וְאִ֖ישׁ נֶ֥גֶד בֵּיתֽוֹ 1 In this context, **a man** means **each man.** It is likely that adult males were intended for this dangerous night duty. “A man in his watch” means that each man should take a turn, and “a man in front of his house” means that each man should keep watch in his own neighborhood. Alternate translation: “Have the men who live in Jerusalem take turns keeping watch in their own neighborhoods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 7 4 d1a5 figs-doublet וְהָעִ֞יר רַחֲבַ֤ת יָדַ֨יִם֙ וּגְדוֹלָ֔ה 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize how large Jerusalem was. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can combine them. Alternate translation: “The city of Jerusalem covered a large area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ NEH 7 71 jxn7 translate-bmoney וְכֶ֕סֶף מָנִ֖ים אַלְפַּ
|
|||
NEH 7 72 zg2v translate-bmoney וַאֲשֶׁ֣ר נָתְנוּ֮ שְׁאֵרִ֣ית הָעָם֒ זָהָ֗ב דַּרְכְּמוֹנִים֙ שְׁתֵּ֣י רִבּ֔וֹא וְכֶ֖סֶף מָנִ֣ים אַלְפָּ֑יִם וְכָתְנֹ֥ת כֹּֽהֲנִ֖ים שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וְשִׁבְעָֽה 1 See the notes in [7:70](../07/70.md) and [7:71](../07/71.md) about “darics,” “minas,” and “tunics.” Alternate translation: “The rest of the people donated 20,000 gold coins, 2,000 silver bars, and 67 garments for the priests to wear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||||
NEH 7 73 jaj3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיֵּשְׁב֣וּ 1 At the end of [7:72](../07/72.md), Nehemiah stops quoting from the document about the first group of people who returned to Judah. The story now goes on to tell what happened next. You could introduce this verse with a word or phrase that indicates this. Alternate translation: “And so … dwelt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
NEH 7 73 e7np translate-unknown הַכֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְהַלְוִיִּ֡ם וְהַשּׁוֹעֲרִים֩ וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֨ים וּמִן־הָעָ֧ם וְהַנְּתִינִ֛ים וְכָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Five of the groups in this list are also named in the document about the people who returned from exile: the priests (verses 39–43), the Levites (verse 43), the gatekeepers (verse 45), the singers (verse 44), and the temple servants (verses 46–56). You can use those same names for these groups here. It is not immediately clear who “some from the people” are, and why they are not included in “all Israel.” You could just say “many ordinary people.” However, there is very similar list in [10:28](../10/28.md) that names these same five groups and also describes people who dedicated themselves to following the law of God. That would unfortunately not have included all of Israel at this point, so that may be the distinction that is in view here. Alternate translation: “the priests, the Levites, the gatekeepers, the singers, the temple servants, some people who dedicated themselves to follow the law, and the rest of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
NEH 7 73 a2ub figs-explicit וַיֵּשְׁב֣וּ…בְּעָרֵיהֶ֑ם וַיִּגַּע֙ הַחֹ֣דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִ֔י וּבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּעָרֵיהֶֽם 1 The rebuilding of the wall was completed that year near the end of Elul, the sixth month of the Hebrew calendar. The implication is that everyone who had come to Jerusalem to work on the wall was then allowed to return home. Within about a week, by the beginning of the seventh month, they were all back home. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “So … returned to their homes, because the rebuilding of the wall had been completed. By the beginning of the next month, they were all back home.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 7 73 a2ub figs-explicit וַיֵּשְׁב֣וּ…בְּעָרֵיהֶ֑ם וַיִּגַּע֙ הַחֹ֣דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִ֔י וּבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּעָרֵיהֶֽם 1 The rebuilding of the wall was completed that year near the end of Elul, the sixth month of the Hebrew calendar. The implication is that everyone who had come to Jerusalem to work on the wall was then allowed to return home. Within about a week, by the beginning of the seventh month, they were all back home. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “So … returned to their homes, because the rebuilding of the wall had been completed. By the beginning of the next month, they were all back home.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 7 73 n26r translate-ordinal הַחֹ֣דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
NEH 8 intro w38v 0 # Nehemiah 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Reading of the law<br><br>During the exile, the Hebrew language was no longer spoken. Only the priests and Levites still understood it. Ezra read the book of the law to the people in Hebrew and the Levites walked among the crowd translating it into Aramaic for the people to understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Festival of Shelters<br><br>After they heard Ezra read the law of Moses, the people obeyed it by making temporary shelters for themselves with tree branches. They did this to remember that their ancestors slept in shelters when they came out of slavery in Egypt.
|
||||
NEH 8 1 q5ih figs-hyperbole כָל־הָעָם֙ 1 The word **all** is a generalization that indicates that everyone who was able and available came to Jerusalem for this occasion. By “the people,” Nehemiah means the groups he described in the previous verse who had come back to live in Judah and Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “The people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -925,7 +925,7 @@ NEH 8 1 e1b7 אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־יִשְׂרָ
|
|||
NEH 8 2 e1b9 figs-explicit עֶזְרָ֣א הַ֠כֹּהֵן 1 This information serves to introduce Ezra further. In addition to being a teacher and learned student of the Law of Moses, he was also a priest whose duties would have included offering sacrifices in the temple and helping people make sure they were following the law in everyday matters. It might be helpful to your readers to explain that here because it shows why Ezra would have been such an effective teacher for everyone on this occasion. Alternate translation: “Ezra was also a priest who served in the temple and helped people follow the law” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 8 2 e1c1 figs-metonymy וַיָּבִ֣יא…אֶֽת־הַתּוֹרָ֞ה לִפְנֵ֤י הַקָּהָל֙ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a group. Alternate translation: “He read the law out loud in front of the whole crowd.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 8 2 j8yl figs-idiom מֵאִ֣ישׁ וְעַד־אִשָּׁ֔ה וְכֹ֖ל מֵבִ֣ין לִשְׁמֹ֑עַ 1 **All who were understanding to hear** is an idiom that means “everyone who could hear with understanding,” that is, “who understood what they were hearing.” This phrase likely refers to children and it would mean “children who were old enough to understand.” Alternate translation: “for the men, the women, and the children who were old enough to understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 8 2 e89a figs-explicit בְּי֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 Since Nehemiah does not say otherwise, the implication is that this happened in the same year that the wall was rebuilt. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He did this on the first day of the seventh month of that same year.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 8 2 e89a figs-explicit בְּי֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 Since Nehemiah does not say otherwise, the implication is that this happened in the same year that the wall was rebuilt. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He did this on the first day of the seventh month of that same year.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 8 2 id7q translate-hebrewmonths בְּי֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 Alternate translation: “On day 1 of month 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
|
||||
NEH 8 3 pkz7 וַיִּקְרָא־בוֹ֩ 1 Here, **it** means the book of the Law of Moses.
|
||||
NEH 8 3 iv9y figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֨י הָרְח֜וֹב אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ לִפְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַמַּ֗יִם 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the front of both places, the square and the gate. Alternate translation: “from the front of the square that is in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ NEH 8 9 e1g5 translate-unknown נְחֶמְיָ֣ה ה֣וּא הַתִּרְ
|
|||
NEH 8 9 e1g7 writing-participants נְחֶמְיָ֣ה ה֣וּא הַתִּרְשָׁ֡תָא 1 This is the first time that Nehemiah appears as a character while someone else is telling the story. Previously in the book, he has been the one telling the story, and so he has referred to himself as “I.” To give him more of an introduction here, you could say something like, “Nehemiah, who was the governor” or “Nehemiah, who was the Tirshatha (that is, the governor).” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||||
NEH 8 9 e1g9 figs-distinguish וְעֶזְרָ֣א הַכֹּהֵ֣ן ׀ הַסֹּפֵ֡ר 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
|
||||
NEH 8 9 e1h1 וְהַלְוִיִּם֩ הַמְּבִינִ֨ים אֶת־הָעָ֜ם 1 See how you translated this phrase in [8:7](../08/07.md). Alternate translation: “The Levites who were explaining the meaning of the Law to the people.”
|
||||
NEH 8 9 e1h3 figs-explicit הַיּ֤וֹם קָדֹֽשׁ־הוּא֙ לַיהוָ֣ה 1 As a note to verse [8:1](../08/01.md) explains, this particular holiday was the Festival of Trumpets. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is a holy day, set apart to worship Yahweh. It is the Festival of Trumpets.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 8 9 e1h3 figs-explicit הַיּ֤וֹם קָדֹֽשׁ־הוּא֙ לַיהוָ֣ה 1 As a note to verse [8:1](../08/01.md) explains, this particular holiday was the Festival of Trumpets. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is a holy day, set apart to worship Yahweh. It is the Festival of Trumpets.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 8 9 e1h5 figs-doublet הַיּ֤וֹם קָדֹֽשׁ־הוּא֙ לַיהוָ֣ה 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The leaders were reminding the people that this was one of the festival days that Yahweh had told them to set apart as special times of worship and celebration. If it would be misunderstood in your language you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “This is a special day for worshiping Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 8 9 e1h7 grammar-connect-logic-result אַל־תִּֽתְאַבְּל֖וּ וְאַל־תִּבְכּ֑וּ 1 The leaders are saying that since this is a day for celebration, it is not appropriate for the people to be weeping. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can show this connection by beginning this sentence with a word such as “so.” Alternate translation: “So do not mourn or cry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 8 9 e1h9 figs-doublet אַל־תִּֽתְאַבְּל֖וּ וְאַל־תִּבְכּ֑וּ 1 **Mourn** and **weep** mean the same thing. The leaders use both words together to emphasize that the people should be cheerful, not sad, on a festival day. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these words in a single expression. Alternate translation: “So you should not be crying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ NEH 8 10 e1j9 figs-explicit כִּֽי־חֶדְוַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה הִ֥י
|
|||
NEH 8 10 sni7 figs-abstractnouns חֶדְוַ֥ת…מָֽעֻזְּכֶֽם 1 for the joy of Yahweh is your strength If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns **joy** and **strength** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “happy … encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 8 11 e1k1 figs-hyperbole מַחְשִׁ֤ים לְכָל־הָעָם֙ 1 These are two overstatements that emphasize how encouraging the Levites were trying to be. **All the people** does not mean everyone in the crowd, but those who were crying. **Be silent** does not mean “say nothing” or “make no noise,” but “stop crying.” (Certainly the Levites hoped that these people would soon be talking and laughing with others at celebration meals.) Alternate translation: “encouraged the people who were weeping to stop crying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
NEH 8 11 e1k3 grammar-connect-logic-result הַ֔סּוּ כִּ֥י הַיּ֖וֹם קָדֹ֑שׁ וְאַל־תֵּעָצֵֽבוּ 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put your translation of “for today is holy” first since it gives the reason for the resulting actions in the other two phrases. You could also show the connection by using a word such as “so.” Alternate translation: “This is a day of celebration, so stop crying now, and do not be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 8 11 sxx6 הַ֔סּוּ 1 This is a word that signals to a person that they should be quiet. If your language has a similar expression, you can use it in your translation. You could also give the meaning in this context, if that would be clearer to your readers. Alternate translation: “Shhh” or “Stop crying now”
|
||||
NEH 8 11 sxx6 הַ֔סּוּ 1 This is a word that signals to a person that they should be quiet. If your language has a similar expression, you can use it in your translation. You could also give the meaning in this context, If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “Shhh” or “Stop crying now”
|
||||
NEH 8 11 fjz6 figs-activepassive וְאַל־תֵּעָצֵֽבוּ 1 Do not be grieved If you expressed the idea behind this phrase with an active form in [8:10](../08/10.md) and you said there what was causing the action, you would not need to repeat that information here. Alternate translation: “do not be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 8 12 e1k5 grammar-connect-logic-result וַיֵּלְכ֨וּ כָל־הָעָ֜ם לֶאֱכֹ֤ל וְלִשְׁתּוֹת֙ וּלְשַׁלַּ֣ח מָנ֔וֹת וְלַעֲשׂ֖וֹת שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put the last phrase at the beginning of the sentence since it gives the reason for the rest of the actions. Alternate translation: “So the people celebrated by eating and drinking and sharing with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
NEH 8 12 e1k7 figs-explicit לֶאֱכֹ֤ל וְלִשְׁתּוֹת֙ 1 The implication is that they enjoyed the special food and drink described in [8:10](.//08/10.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating rich foods and drinking sweet drinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1165,9 +1165,9 @@ NEH 9 23 w96j figs-simile וּבְנֵיהֶ֣ם הִרְבִּ֔יתָ כ
|
|||
NEH 9 23 t5pb figs-hyperbole וּבְנֵיהֶ֣ם הִרְבִּ֔יתָ כְּכֹכְבֵ֖י הַשָּׁמָ֑יִם 1 This is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You enabled them to have a very large number of children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
NEH 9 23 f1n5 figs-metaphor וּבְנֵיהֶ֣ם 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” In this context it includes both boys and girls. Alternate translation: “and children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 9 23 f1n7 figs-explicit וַתְּבִיאֵם֙ אֶל־הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁר־אָמַ֥רְתָּ לַאֲבֹתֵיהֶ֖ם לָב֥וֹא לָרָֽשֶׁת 1 This is the same **land** described in verse 15, the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You brought them back to the land of Canaan, the land that you had commanded the previous generation to enter and occupy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 9 23 f1n9 figs-gendernotations לַאֲבֹתֵיהֶ֖ם 1 While **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors” throughout much of this prayer, in this case the word is intended more literally. It means the previous generation of Israelites, who had disobeyed when God told them the first time to occupy the land. But since both men and women were involved in the disobedience, you could use a term that would not limit the meaning to men, if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to the previous generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
NEH 9 23 f1n9 figs-gendernotations לַאֲבֹתֵיהֶ֖ם 1 While **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors” throughout much of this prayer, in this case the word is intended more literally. It means the previous generation of Israelites, who had disobeyed when God told them the first time to occupy the land. But since both men and women were involved in the disobedience, you could use a term that would not limit the meaning to men, If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “to the previous generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
NEH 9 24 f1o1 figs-parallelism וַיָּבֹ֤אוּ הַבָּנִים֙ וַיִּֽירְשׁ֣וּ אֶת־הָאָ֔רֶץ וַתַּכְנַ֨ע לִפְנֵיהֶ֜ם אֶת־יֹשְׁבֵ֤י הָאָ֨רֶץ֙ הַכְּנַ֣עֲנִ֔ים 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The Israelites of the next generation possessing the land is equivalent to Yahweh defeating its inhabitants when the Israelites fought against them. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “You enabled the next generation of Israelites to defeat the people who were living in the land of Canaan so that they could occupy the land themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
NEH 9 24 qpd4 figs-gendernotations הַבָּנִים֙ 1 This means literally the children of the generation that refused to enter the land. But since both men and women were involved in occupying the land, you could use a term that would not limit the meaning to men, if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the next generation of Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
NEH 9 24 qpd4 figs-gendernotations הַבָּנִים֙ 1 This means literally the children of the generation that refused to enter the land. But since both men and women were involved in occupying the land, you could use a term that would not limit the meaning to men, If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “the next generation of Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
NEH 9 24 it8a figs-metonymy וַתַּכְנַ֨ע לִפְנֵיהֶ֜ם אֶת־יֹשְׁבֵ֤י הָאָ֨רֶץ֙ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a group, in this case the Israelite army that was fighting against the Canaanites. Alternate translation: “when the Israelites opposed them in battle, you defeated the people who were living in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 9 24 l77q figs-doublet יֹשְׁבֵ֤י הָאָ֨רֶץ֙ הַכְּנַ֣עֲנִ֔ים 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used for clarity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites who lived there,” otherwise “the people who lived here in this land, the descendants of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
NEH 9 24 vz5v figs-explicit וַֽתִּתְּנֵ֖ם בְּיָדָ֑ם וְאֶת־מַלְכֵיהֶם֙ וְאֶת־עַֽמְמֵ֣י הָאָ֔רֶץ לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת בָּהֶ֖ם כִּרְצוֹנָֽם 1 The Levites continue to recount details of Israelite history and assume that their listeners will understand the significance of these details. This sentence means, “You gave the Canaanites into the hands of the Israelites, that is, you gave their kings and the Canaanite people into the hands of the Israelites.” The implication is that once the Israelites had defeated the armies that the kings were leading, they could then do anything they wanted with the people who were living in the land. In other words, Yahweh gave the kings “into their hands” by defeating them, and as a result, the people were “in their hands” to do with whatever they wanted. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You enabled them to defeat the armies that the Canaanite kings were leading, and then they could do whatever they wanted with the people of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1224,7 +1224,7 @@ NEH 9 32 ta8y figs-metonymy אַל־יִמְעַ֣ט לְפָנֶ֡יךָ
|
|||
NEH 9 32 f7a5 figs-personification הַתְּלָאָ֣ה אֲֽשֶׁר־מְ֠צָאַתְנוּ 1 Here the Levites speak of the suffering that the Israelites have experienced as if it were a living thing that has looked for them and found them in order to cause them harm. Alternate translation: “the sufferings we have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
NEH 9 32 q7fm figs-abstractnouns הַתְּלָאָ֣ה אֲֽשֶׁר־מְ֠צָאַתְנוּ 1 **Hardship** is an abstract noun that refers to the suffering that the Israelites have experienced as a result of being conquered and dominated by foreign nations. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how much we have suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
NEH 9 32 u6i9 figs-metaphor וְלַאֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ 1 **Fathers** here figuratively means **ancestors.** Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 9 32 pl1f figs-explicit מִימֵי֙ מַלְכֵ֣י אַשּׁ֔וּר עַ֖ד הַיּ֥וֹם הַזֶּֽה 1 The implication is that the Levites are talking about the suffering that the Israelites have experienced specifically because foreign nations have conquered them, beginning with the Assyrians who first conquered the northern part of Israel. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time Israel was first conquered by the Assyrian kings until now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 9 32 pl1f figs-explicit מִימֵי֙ מַלְכֵ֣י אַשּׁ֔וּר עַ֖ד הַיּ֥וֹם הַזֶּֽה 1 The implication is that the Levites are talking about the suffering that the Israelites have experienced specifically because foreign nations have conquered them, beginning with the Assyrians who first conquered the northern part of Israel. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time Israel was first conquered by the Assyrian kings until now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
NEH 9 32 r5ha figs-merism מִימֵי֙ מַלְכֵ֣י אַשּׁ֔וּר עַ֖ד הַיּ֥וֹם הַזֶּֽה 1 This is a figure of speech in which the Levites are describing an entire time period by reference to its beginning and end, in order to include everything in between. Alternate translation: “the entire time we have been under foreign domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||||
NEH 9 33 ctq5 וְאַתָּ֣ה צַדִּ֔יק עַ֖ל כָּל־הַבָּ֣א עָלֵ֑ינוּ 1 Here the word **righteous** refers to God’s actions as being a reflection of his righteous character. Alternate translation: “we acknowledge you have done the right thing in allowing all this to happen to us”
|
||||
NEH 9 33 ac1s figs-personification כָּל־הַבָּ֣א עָלֵ֑ינוּ 1 Here the Levites speak of the suffering that the Israelites have experienced as if it were a living thing that has come up to them in order to cause them harm. Alternate translation: “everything we have suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1307,7 +1307,7 @@ NEH 10 28 g1a7 figs-idiom בְּנֵיהֶ֣ם וּבְנֹתֵיהֶ֑
|
|||
NEH 10 29 l6ns figs-metaphor מַחֲזִיקִ֣ים עַל 1 Here, **clinging to** is a figurative way of describing people who did not actually sign the scroll, as their leaders did, but who agreed with them and joined in the same purpose. Alternate translation: “agreed with” or “joined in the same purpose with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 10 29 x6i9 figs-metaphor אֲחֵיהֶם֮ 1 Here, **brother** likely means figuratively that the leaders who signed the scroll were fellow Jews of the rest of the people. Alternate translation: “their fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 10 29 k971 אַדִּירֵיהֶם֒ 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens”
|
||||
NEH 10 29 p6ry figs-metonymy וּבָאִ֞ים בְּאָלָ֣ה וּבִשְׁבוּעָ֗ה 1 Here the story describes the covenant figuratively by two things associated with it. As part of the covenant, the people swore an oath to keep its terms, and they also said that anyone who broke its terms should be cursed. (That is, God should punish them.) If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the meaning behind this figure. Alternate translation: “they made a serious agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 10 29 p6ry figs-metonymy וּבָאִ֞ים בְּאָלָ֣ה וּבִשְׁבוּעָ֗ה 1 Here the story describes the covenant figuratively by two things associated with it. As part of the covenant, the people swore an oath to keep its terms, and they also said that anyone who broke its terms should be cursed. (That is, God should punish them.) If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning behind this figure. Alternate translation: “they made a serious agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
NEH 10 29 ny6b figs-metaphor וּבָאִ֞ים בְּאָלָ֣ה וּבִשְׁבוּעָ֗ה 1 **Entering** is a figurative way of saying that the people became parties to this agreement with God. The expression speaks as if the covenant were something that the people could physically go inside of, in order to become a part of it. Alternate translation: “they became parties to the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 10 29 g1a9 figs-idiom לָלֶ֨כֶת֙ בְּתוֹרַ֣ת הָאֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 As in [5:9](../05/09.md), **walk** is an idiom that describes a person’s conduct in life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives in obedience to the law of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 10 29 t8sp figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֣ר נִתְּנָ֔ה בְּיַ֖ד מֹשֶׁ֣ה 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which Moses gave to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1582,7 +1582,7 @@ NEH 12 23 i1e3 figs-ellipsis רָאשֵׁ֣י הָֽאָב֔וֹת 1 This se
|
|||
NEH 12 23 i1e5 figs-metaphor רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 12 23 i1e7 figs-idiom עַל־סֵ֖פֶר דִּבְרֵ֣י הַיָּמִ֑ים 1 This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events. Alternate translation: “in their chronicles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 12 23 d2rp figs-idiom וְעַד־יְמֵ֖י יֽוֹחָנָ֥ן 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “through the time when Johanan was the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 12 23 i1e9 translate-names יֽוֹחָנָ֥ן 1 **Johanan** is the name of a man. The context indicates that he was a Jewish high priest, and so he seems to be the same man who is called “Jonathan” in verse 11. If you think it would make things clearer for your readers, you could use the same name both here and in verse 11, either “Johanan” or “Jonathan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 12 23 i1e9 translate-names יֽוֹחָנָ֥ן 1 **Johanan** is the name of a man. The context indicates that he was a Jewish high priest, and so he seems to be the same man who is called “Jonathan” in verse 11. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the same name both here and in verse 11, either “Johanan” or “Jonathan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 12 23 i1f1 figs-metaphor בֶּן־אֶלְיָשִֽׁיב 1 **Eliashib** is the name of a man. Verse [12:10](../12/10.md) shows that Johanan/Jonathan was not actually his son, but his grandson. So **son** here figuratively means “descendant.” Alternate translation: “the grandson of Eliashib” or “the descendant of Eliashib” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 12 24 kx4z figs-ellipsis וְרָאשֵׁ֣י הַ֠לְוִיִּם…לְהַלֵּ֣ל לְהוֹד֔וֹת 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This sentence seems to mean “The Levite leaders who directed the choir that sang songs of praise and thanksgiving were…” You could say something like that as an alternate translation if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
NEH 12 24 d373 figs-metaphor וְרָאשֵׁ֣י הַ֠לְוִיִּם 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Levites” or “the Levite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ NEH 13 4 k1c9 writing-background וְלִפְנֵ֣י מִזֶּ֔ה 1
|
|||
NEH 13 4 k1d1 figs-metaphor וְלִפְנֵ֣י מִזֶּ֔ה 1 In this book, the expression **face** often refers figuratively to the front of a person, place, or object. Here the expression has the further figurative significance of “in front of” or “before” a certain time. Alternate translation: “before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
NEH 13 4 k1d3 translate-names אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ 1 This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
NEH 13 4 k1d5 figs-distinguish אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַכֹּהֵ֔ן 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Eliashib was. As we learn in [3:1](../03/01.md), [3:20](../03/20.md), and [12:10](../12/10.md), he was actually the Jewish high priest during the time of Nehemiah. Alternate translation: “the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
|
||||
NEH 13 4 bq8k figs-activepassive אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַכֹּהֵ֔ן נָת֖וּן 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “they appointed Eliashib the priest” or “the leaders appointed Eliashib the priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 13 4 bq8k figs-activepassive אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַכֹּהֵ֔ן נָת֖וּן 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “they appointed Eliashib the priest” or “the leaders appointed Eliashib the priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
NEH 13 4 k1d7 figs-idiom נָת֖וּן בְּלִשְׁכַּ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֑ינוּ 1 This is most likely a figurative way of saying that as high priest, Eliashib had responsibility for and control over all the rooms in the temple. Alternate translation: “since he had control over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
NEH 13 4 adq9 קָר֖וֹב לְטוֹבִיָּֽה 1 He was related to Tobiah Since Tobiah was an Ammonite, Eliashib could not have been his close blood relative. So this expression must refer to a connection by marriage. We learn in [6:18](../06/18.md) that both Tobiah and his son had married Jewish women, and one or both of these women may have been relatives of Eliashib. Alternate translation: “who was related to Tobiah by marriage”
|
||||
NEH 13 4 c9hf figs-synecdoche בְּלִשְׁכַּ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֑ינוּ 1 Here one **chamber** or room is used figuratively to mean “every chamber” or room in the temple. Alternate translation: “every room in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
|
|
@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ EST 2 11 jd81 figs-idiom וּבְכָל־י֣וֹם וָי֔וֹם 1 An
|
|||
EST 2 11 abd1 מָרְדֳּכַי֙ מִתְהַלֵּ֔ךְ 1 Mordecai was walking about Express this in the way your language describes an action that someone repeats over and over. For example, you can say, “Mordecai would walk around.”
|
||||
EST 2 11 jd83 figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֖י חֲצַ֣ר 1 before the face of the courtyard Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a place. So you could say, “in front of the courtyard.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EST 2 11 abd2 בֵּית־הַנָּשִׁ֑ים 1 the house of women Alternate translation: “the harem for virgins”
|
||||
EST 2 11 abd3 grammar-connect-logic-result לָדַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּמַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽהּ 1 in order to know the welfare of Esther and what was being done with her This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. You can place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said, if that would be clearer in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 2 11 abd3 grammar-connect-logic-result לָדַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּמַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽהּ 1 in order to know the welfare of Esther and what was being done with her This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. You can place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said, If it would be misunderstood in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 2 11 nz1p שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 the welfare of Esther Alternate translation: “how Esther was doing” or “about Esther’s well-being”
|
||||
EST 2 11 abd4 figs-parallelism שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּמַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽהּ 1 the welfare of Esther and what was being done with her These two phrases mean similar things. The story is using the repetition to emphasize how concerned Mordecai was for Esther. You could combine them and say, “how Esther was doing” or “if Esther was all right.”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
EST 2 12 jcj8 writing-background וּבְהַגִּ֡יעַ 1 Now when … came Verses 12 to 14 are background information about how the virgins who were gathered for the king became his concubines. These verses are not specifically about Esther, but about the women in general. Use your language’s way of letting your readers know that this is background information by using a connecting word or a phrase such as, “This is how virgins became concubines for the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -319,24 +319,24 @@ EST 3 2 abi4 figs-explicit וְכָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַמֶּ֜לֶך
|
|||
EST 3 2 e25k translate-symaction כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּמִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 were bowing down and prostrating themselves This means that the other officials humbled themselves and lay flat on the ground before Haman. These actions represented recognition and respect for the very high position that the king had given him in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
EST 3 2 abi5 figs-doublet כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּמִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 were bowing down and prostrating themselves These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the officials knew how important it was to obey the king’s command and honor Haman in this way. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “bow down all the way to the ground.” Alternate translation: “bowing and lying down on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
EST 3 2 fg8v וּמִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 and prostrating themselves to Haman This means bowing down all the way to the ground.
|
||||
EST 3 2 jd99 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣וֹ 1 for thus the king had commanded concerning him If that would be clearer in your language, you can put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 3 2 jd99 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣וֹ 1 for thus the king had commanded concerning him If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 3 2 abi6 figs-explicit כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣וֹ 1 for thus the king had commanded concerning him The king did this as a sign of Haman’s new position. You can state this here or in a separate sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “the king had commanded them to do this in order to show that he had given Haman such a high position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 2 abi7 figs-parallelism וּמָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְלֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 But Mordecai would neither bow down nor would he prostrate himself These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was against the king’s command and how much determination it took for Mordecai to remain standing. You could combine these phrases as UST does and say, “But Mordecai refused to bow down to Haman.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
EST 3 2 abi8 figs-explicit וּמָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְלֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 But Mordecai would neither bow down nor would he prostrate himself It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. You can say this explicitly if it would make your translation clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 2 abi8 figs-explicit וּמָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְלֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 But Mordecai would neither bow down nor would he prostrate himself It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. You can say this explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 3 abi9 עַבְדֵ֥י הַמֶּ֛לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּשַׁ֥עַר הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the servants of the king who were at the gate of the king See how you translated this expression at the beginning of [3:2](../03/02.md).
|
||||
EST 3 3 abj0 figs-explicit וַיֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ…לְמָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 said to Mordecai They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. You can say this explicitly if that would be clearer in your language. You can say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 3 abj0 figs-explicit וַיֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ…לְמָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 said to Mordecai They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. You can say this explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. You can say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 3 abj1 מַדּ֨וּעַ֙ אַתָּ֣ה עוֹבֵ֔ר אֵ֖ת מִצְוַ֥ת הַמֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Why are you trespassing the command of the king? Alternative translation: “why are you disobeying the king’s command” or “why are you not obeying what the king commanded”
|
||||
EST 3 4 jd3r figs-explicit באמרם אֵלָיו֙ 1 when they spoke to him This means that they spoke to him about not bowing down. Specifically, they warned him that he would be severely punished if he kept disobeying the king and not honoring his highest official. You can say that explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 4 jd1r figs-idiom י֣וֹם וָי֔וֹם 1 day by day This expression means “every day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 3 4 abj2 figs-idiom וַיְהִ֗י באמרם אֵלָיו֙…וְלֹ֥א שָׁמַ֖ע אֲלֵיהֶ֑ם 1 Now it happened that, when they spoke … he did not listen to them. Here, **he did not listen** means he did not heed their warning or he did not do what they said. Mordecai heard them, but he did not do what they advised him to do. This means that even though the other officials questioned him and probably warned him, he still refused to bow down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 3 4 uek4 figs-idiom וַיַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְהָמָ֗ן לִרְאוֹת֙ הֲיַֽעַמְדוּ֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 So they told Haman to see if the words of Mordecai would stand In this context, **standing** figuratively means to survive a challenge, and **words** means the reasons that Mordecai gave for his actions. This phrase means that the other officials told Haman about it to see if he would tolerate it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 3 4 abj3 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָהֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If that would be clearer in your language, you can put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 3 4 abj4 figs-explicit כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָהֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. You could say that explicitly if that would be clearer in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 4 abj3 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָהֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 3 4 abj4 figs-explicit כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָהֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. You could say that explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 5 abj5 figs-metaphor וַיַּ֣רְא הָמָ֔ן 1 The Haman saw Here, **seeing** figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Haman learned about this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 3 5 njt5 figs-parallelism אֵ֣ין מָרְדֳּכַ֔י כֹּרֵ֥עַ וּמִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה ל֑וֹ 1 Mordecai would neither bow down nor prostrate himself to him These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was. You could combine them as UST does and say, “Mordecai was refusing to bow down to him.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai would not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
EST 3 5 wk8p figs-metaphor וַיִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֖ן חֵמָֽה 1 And Haman was filled with rage Here, **Haman’s rage** is spoken of as something that could fill him up. You could say that he was furious or extremely angry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 3 6 k5h9 figs-activepassive וַיִּ֣בֶז בְּעֵינָ֗יו 1 And it was despised in his eyes You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Haman considered that it was not enough” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EST 3 6 abj6 figs-explicit וַיִּ֣בֶז בְּעֵינָ֗יו 1 And it was despised in his eyes Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. You could say that explicitly if that would be clearer in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 6 abj6 figs-explicit וַיִּ֣בֶז בְּעֵינָ֗יו 1 And it was despised in his eyes Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. You could say that explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 6 abj7 וַיִּ֣בֶז 1 it was despised **Despise** in this context means not to hate but to think little of or think something is too small. This expression means that Haman decided it would not be enough just to kill Mordecai alone.
|
||||
EST 3 6 jd9r figs-metaphor בְּעֵינָ֗יו 1 in his eyes Here, **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and in this case “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This phrase means in Haman’s judgment. Alternate translation: “as he saw it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 3 6 abj8 לִשְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ בְּמָרְדֳּכַ֣י לְבַדּ֔וֹ 1 to stretch out a hand against Mordecai alone Alternate translation: “he rejected the idea of killing only Mordecai” or “he decided to kill more than just Mordecai” or “he decided that it would not be enough to get rid of only Mordecai”
|
||||
|
|
@ -352,13 +352,13 @@ EST 3 7 tw99 translate-ordinal בִּשְׁנַת֙ שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶש
|
|||
EST 3 7 g4lt translate-names הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ ה֨וּא הַגּוֹרָ֜ל 1 a Pur (which is “the lot”) The storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and the word for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 abk3 translate-unknown הַגּוֹרָ֜ל 1 the lot A **lot** was an object with different markings on various sides that was used, most likely by dropping it on the ground, to select a specific time for doing something. The belief was that God or the gods would control which way the object fell, thus guiding the selection process and granting favor to the action if it were done on the date chosen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 abk4 figs-activepassive הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 a Pur … was cast You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “Haman had his servants cast a Pur.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 abk5 grammar-connect-logic-result הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 a Pur … was cast If that would be clearer in your language, you can put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 abk5 grammar-connect-logic-result הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 a Pur … was cast If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 j13r figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י הָמָ֗ן 1 before the face of Haman Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Haman was physically present when the lot was cast. Alternate translation: “as Haman watched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 j15r מִיּ֧וֹם ׀ לְי֛וֹם וּמֵחֹ֛דֶשׁ לְחֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 from day to day and from month to month This expression means that the lot was cast to select a particular day of the month and a particular month of the year.
|
||||
EST 3 7 j17r figs-explicit מִיּ֧וֹם ׀ לְי֛וֹם וּמֵחֹ֛דֶשׁ לְחֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 from day to day and from month to month Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. You can say that explicitly if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 j17r figs-explicit מִיּ֧וֹם ׀ לְי֛וֹם וּמֵחֹ֛דֶשׁ לְחֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 from day to day and from month to month Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. You can say that explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 ih4b translate-hebrewmonths שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. This name occurs several times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 abk6 שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar See how you decided in [2:16](../02/16.md) and the first part of this verse to represent the dates that are given in the Hebrew calendar in the book of Esther. Be consistent.
|
||||
EST 3 7 abk7 figs-explicit שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. You can say that explicitly if that would be clearer in your language. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate Translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 abk7 figs-explicit שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. You can say that explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate Translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 7 k3vd translate-ordinal שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 the twelfth Alternative translation: “month twelve” or “the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
EST 3 8 abk8 figs-explicit וַיֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ לַמֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 Then Haman said to the king Ahasuerus The implication is that Haman then went to see the king so that he could speak with him. You could say that explicitly. Do not give your readers the impression that the king was present with Haman while he was casting the lot. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 3 8 aig9 translate-numbers יֶשְׁנ֣וֹ עַם־אֶחָ֗ד 1 He has one people **He** refers to the king, and **one people** refers to the Jews as a people group. So this means there is a people group or a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -470,11 +470,11 @@ EST 4 8 j47r figs-metonymy מִלְּפָנָ֖יו 1 to go to the king
|
|||
EST 4 8 abq3 עַל־עַמָּֽהּ 1 concerning her people Alternate translation: “to act mercifully toward her people”
|
||||
EST 4 10 abq5 וַתֹּ֤אמֶר אֶסְתֵּר֙ לַהֲתָ֔ךְ וַתְּצַוֵּ֖הוּ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 Then Esther spoke to Hathak and commanded him to say to Mordecai: Alternate translation: “then Esther told Hathak to go back to Mordecai and tell him this”
|
||||
EST 4 11 abq6 figs-merism כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַמֶּ֡לֶךְ וְעַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַמֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 All the servants of the king and the people of the provinces of the king are knowing **All the servants of the king** refers to the royal officials in the palace. **The people of the provinces** refers to those living out in the empire. So this phrase means something like “those both near and far.” Esther is using a figure of speech to refer to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “everyone in the whole empire knows.” Alternate translation: “all the king’s officials and all the people in the empire know this law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||||
EST 4 11 abq7 כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַמֶּ֡לֶךְ וְעַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַמֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 All the servants of the king and the people of the provinces of the king are knowing Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, if that would be clearer in your language, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.
|
||||
EST 4 11 abq7 כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַמֶּ֡לֶךְ וְעַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַמֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 All the servants of the king and the people of the provinces of the king are knowing Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, If it would be misunderstood in your language, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.
|
||||
EST 4 11 d9mh figs-merism כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ וְאִשָּׁ֡ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 for any man or woman Here, Esther once again refers to a group figuratively by describing two parts of it. She means all of the people whom Ahasuerus rules as king. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “anyone”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||||
EST 4 11 abq8 translate-symaction יָבֽוֹא־אֶל־הַמֶּלֶךְ֩ אֶל־הֶחָצֵ֨ר הַפְּנִימִ֜ית 1 who goes to the king, to the inner court As [5:1](../05/01.md) makes clear, this refers to a courtyard right outside the room where King Ahasuerus sat on his throne. He could see out of the entrance to the room into the courtyard and tell if anyone came and stood there. Anyone who did that was asking to speak to the king. Alternate translation: “who goes into the inner courtyard of the palace, where the king can see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
EST 4 11 abq9 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־יִקָּרֵ֗א 1 who has not been called If it would help your readers to understand, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when the king has not summoned that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EST 4 11 abr0 אַחַ֤ת דָּתוֹ֙ 1 his law is one Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom” If that would be clearer in your language, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself.
|
||||
EST 4 11 abr0 אַחַ֤ת דָּתוֹ֙ 1 his law is one Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom” If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself.
|
||||
EST 4 11 abr1 לְהָמִ֔ית 1 to cause to die Alternate translation: “that person must be executed” or “the guards will kill that person”
|
||||
EST 4 11 abr2 translate-symaction לְ֠בַד מֵאֲשֶׁ֨ר יֽוֹשִׁיט־ל֥וֹ הַמֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַזָּהָ֖ב 1 apart from when the king holds out to him the scepter of gold, then he will live If the king pointed his scepter toward a person, that meant that the king was accepting him. Alternate translation: “unless the king extends his golden scepter towards him”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
EST 4 11 abr3 translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַזָּהָ֖ב 1 the scepter of gold A scepter was an ornamental staff or wand that rulers carried or held as a symbol of their authority. According to this, the scepter of King Ahasuerus was made of gold. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -570,13 +570,13 @@ EST 5 13 wu84 וְכָל־זֶ֕ה 1 But all of this Haman is continuing to
|
|||
EST 5 13 abw1 figs-distinguish הַיְּהוּדִ֔י 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
|
||||
EST 5 13 abw2 figs-explicit יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּשַׁ֥עַר הַמֶּֽלֶךְ 1 sitting at the gate of the king Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 13 abw3 בְּשַׁ֥עַר הַמֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the gate of the king Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
|
||||
EST 5 14 abw4 figs-explicit וַתֹּ֣אמֶר לוֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜וֹ וְכָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗יו 1 Then … said to him The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be clearer, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 abw4 figs-explicit וַתֹּ֣אמֶר לוֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜וֹ וְכָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗יו 1 Then … said to him The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 j81r וְכָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗יו 1 with all his friends This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
|
||||
EST 5 14 abw5 figs-explicit יַֽעֲשׂוּ 1 Let them make You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 i2f3 translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 a tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 k8zd translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒ 1 50 cubits high You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 hiui figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַמֶּ֗לֶךְ וְיִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔יו 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 abw7 figs-explicit וְיִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔יו 1 say to the king, and let them hang Mordecai on it If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 hiui figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַמֶּ֗לֶךְ וְיִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔יו 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 abw7 figs-explicit וְיִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔יו 1 say to the king, and let them hang Mordecai on it If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 abw8 grammar-connect-logic-result וּבֹֽא…אֶל הַמִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה שָׂמֵ֑חַ 1 Then go … to the banquet joyful **Then** indicates more than a time sequence here. Zeresh and the friends are saying what the result would be. Alternate translation: “after he is dead, you will be able to go to the banquet … in a good mood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 bbs9 figs-metonymy וַיִּיטַ֧ב הַדָּבָ֛ר לִפְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן 1 And the word was good before the face of Haman The **word** was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, **face** figuratively represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EST 5 14 i8is וַיַּ֥עַשׂ הָעֵֽץ 1 and he made the tree Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”
|
||||
|
|
@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ EST 6 4 rg8t לַחֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ
|
|||
EST 6 4 vu7p לֵאמֹ֣ר לַמֶּ֔לֶךְ לִתְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 to say to the king to hang Mordecai Alternate translation: “to tell the king that he wanted to hang Mordecai” or “to tell the king that he wanted to impale Mordecai”
|
||||
EST 6 4 at53 הָעֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽוֹ 1 the tree that he had prepared for him Alternate translation: “on the pole that he had set up” or “on the gallows that he had set up for Mordecai”
|
||||
EST 6 4 aby4 translate-unknown הָעֵ֖ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
EST 6 5 aby5 figs-explicit וַיֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 And the young men of the king said It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. You can say so if it would make the translation clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 5 aby5 figs-explicit וַיֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 And the young men of the king said It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. You can say so If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 5 j93r figs-explicit הִנֵּ֥ה 1 Behold This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. You could also have the young men address the king directly to get his attention. Alternate translation: “O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 5 j95r יָבֽוֹא 1 Let him come Alternate translation: “he may come in”
|
||||
EST 6 6 j97r וַיָּבוֹא֮ הָמָן֒ וַיֹּ֤אמֶר לוֹ֙ הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then Haman came, and the king said to him Alternate translation: “when Haman came in, the king said”
|
||||
|
|
@ -626,9 +626,9 @@ EST 6 8 abz0 figs-explicit וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר
|
|||
EST 6 8 abz1 figs-abstractnouns כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת 1 a crown of royalty **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal crown.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 pp3l figs-metaphor וְנָת֨וֹן הַלְּב֜וּשׁ וְהַסּ֗וּס עַל־יַד־אִ֞ישׁ מִשָּׂרֵ֤י הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Then give this garment and this horse into the hand of a man from the most noble officials of the king Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. It appears that the king himself would not perform such acts of service to one of his subjects even if he really wanted to honor that person. So Haman is saying that on behalf of the king, representing his authority and power, one of the king’s most noble officials should present the man with the robe and the horse. Alternate translation: “then, on your behalf, have one of your most noble officials present the man with the robe and the horse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 j1d3 figs-123person אִ֞ישׁ מִשָּׂרֵ֤י הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַֽפַּרְתְּמִ֔ים 1 a man from the most noble officials of the king Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the second person. Alternate translation: “one of your most noble officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 pfz6 figs-explicit וְהִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙ 1 And let them clothe Since **them** is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. You can say this explicitly if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 pfz6 figs-explicit וְהִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙ 1 And let them clothe Since **them** is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. You can say this explicitly If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 j1d5 figs-idiom הָאִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽיקָר֑וֹ 1 the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 abz2 figs-123person הָאִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽיקָר֑וֹ 1 the man in whose honor the king is delighted Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would clearer in your language, you can use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 abz2 figs-123person הָאִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽיקָר֑וֹ 1 the man in whose honor the king is delighted Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
EST 6 9 abz4 בִּרְח֣וֹב הָעִ֔יר 1 in the open place of the city This refers to a large, open space in the city, either the space that was in front of the palace (as in [4:6](../04/06.md)), or a space inside one of the city gates. In either case, this would have been a public area where people could gather, and so it was a place where a great number of people would have seen how the king was honoring Mordecai. Alternate translation: “through the public square of the city”
|
||||
EST 6 9 qs3k וְקָרְא֣וּ 1 and proclaim Alternate translation: “and tell the noble official and servants to proclaim” or “and have them shout out”
|
||||
EST 6 9 j1d7 figs-metonymy לְפָנָ֔יו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that the servants were to shout out to the people in front of the man on the horse, that is, to the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “to whoever is in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ EST 6 11 j2d5 figs-metonymy וַיִּקְרָ֣א לְפָנָ֔יו 1
|
|||
EST 6 11 j2d7 figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּיקָרֽוֹ 1 Thus shall it be done for the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 6 12 uri5 translate-symaction אָבֵ֖ל וַחֲפ֥וּי רֹֽאשׁ 1 mourning with a covering of head People often covered their heads to show that they were either extremely sad or ashamed. Alternate translation: “covering his head because he felt completely disgraced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
EST 6 13 j3d1 figs-explicit וַיְסַפֵּ֨ר הָמָ֜ן 1 Then Haman recounted The implication is that, just as Haman gathered his friends together in [5:10](../05/10.md) to boast of his status, now he gathered them together once again to talk about what had just happened. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman brought all his friends together again. He told…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 13 aca1 figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑הוּ 1 everything that had happened to him The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If that would be clearer in your language, you can say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 13 aca1 figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑הוּ 1 everything that had happened to him The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 13 aca2 figs-explicit וַיֹּ֩אמְרוּ֩ ל֨וֹ חֲכָמָ֜יו וְזֶ֣רֶשׁ 1 Then his wise men and Zeresh said to him The implication is that, just as King Ahasuerus had royal advisors, Haman had advisors of his own. They would have been included among the “friends” he gathered for this occasion. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his friends were also his advisors, and they and his wife Zeresh told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 6 13 aca3 חֲכָמָ֜יו 1 his wise men See how you translated this expression in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “his advisors”
|
||||
EST 6 13 fd5k figs-metaphor אִ֣ם…מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁר֩ הַחִלּ֨וֹתָ לִנְפֹּ֤ל לְפָנָיו֙ 1 If Mordecai, before whose face you have begun to fall This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) The action of falling could refer to bowing down and it could be a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated. Haman wanted Mordecai to bow down in front of him. But instead, the story would be saying that Haman is starting to bow down (in a metaphorical sense) in front of Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to humiliate you. If he…” (2) “Fall” could be a figurative way of saying “be killed in battle.” In that case, Zeresh would be comparing Haman and Mordecai to two soldiers who are fighting. She is saying that Haman has already “begun to fall,” that is, he is losing the battle, and he is likely to be killed. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to defeat you. Since he…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ EST 7 6 j5d5 figs-doublet צַ֣ר וְאוֹיֵ֔ב 1 A man, and adversary,
|
|||
EST 7 6 ar4f נִבְעַ֔ת 1 was terrified Alternative translation: “was extremely afraid”
|
||||
EST 7 6 j5d9 figs-metonymy נִבְעַ֔ת מִלִּפְנֵ֥י 1 terrified from before the face of Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that Haman was now extremely afraid to be in the presence of King Ahasuerus and Queen Esther. Alternate translation: “this made Haman very afraid to be in the presence of the king and the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EST 7 7 bzd4 figs-idiom וְהַמֶּ֜לֶךְ קָ֤ם בַּחֲמָתוֹ֙ מִמִּשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַיַּ֔יִן 1 Then the king rose up in his rage from the banquet of wine Here, **in his rage** is an idiom meaning to be extremely angry. Alternate translation: “the king was extremely angry and got up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 7 7 j6d1 figs-explicit אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַבִּיתָ֑ן 1 rose up … to the garden of the palace The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it is clearer, you can say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 7 7 j6d1 figs-explicit אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַבִּיתָ֑ן 1 rose up … to the garden of the palace The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it would be misunderstood, you can say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 7 7 uaq6 figs-metaphor לְבַקֵּ֤שׁ עַל־נַפְשׁוֹ֙ 1 in order to seek for his life Here, **seeking** figuratively means to beg or plead urgently for something. This phrase means that Haman wanted to beg Esther to persuade the king not to order his execution. Alternate translation: “to plead with Queen Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 7 7 qz1m figs-metaphor כִּ֣י רָאָ֔ה 1 for he saw Here, **seeing** is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “he realized” or “he understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 7 7 nin1 figs-activepassive כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛יו הָרָעָ֖ה מֵאֵ֥ת הַמֶּֽלֶךְ 1 evil was determined against him by the king You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king had decided to cause a disaster against him” or “the king was decided to destroy him” or “the king had decided to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ EST 7 8 h4c7 figs-explicit וְהָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַמּ
|
|||
EST 7 8 acb8 figs-events וְהָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַמִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔יהָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was If you prefer to present the events in chronological order, you can put this information first in the verse. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
EST 7 8 acb9 figs-idiom וְהָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַמִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔יהָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was The expression **was fallen** means that as Haman was begging for his life, he was not standing up; he had suddenly come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a couch. (From the impression that the king got when he returned, it is possible that Haman was even grabbing her arms or shoulders as he pleaded with Esther.) Alternate translation: “Haman had come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a banqueting couch” or “Haman had thrown himself down on the couch where Esther was reclining”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 7 8 acc0 הַמִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔יהָ 1 the couch on which Esther was In this culture, especially at a banquet like this one, wealthy people would recline on couches as they ate and drank. Alternate translation: “Esther’s banqueting couch”
|
||||
EST 7 8 thq6 figs-rquestion הֲ֠גַם לִכְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַמַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖י בַּבָּ֑יִת 1 Is it also to subdue the queen, with me, in the house? The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If it is clearer in your language, you can phrase it as<br>a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EST 7 8 thq6 figs-rquestion הֲ֠גַם לִכְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַמַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖י בַּבָּ֑יִת 1 Is it also to subdue the queen, with me, in the house? The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can phrase it as<br>a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EST 7 8 l4ce figs-euphemism לִכְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַמַּלְכָּ֛ה 1 to subdue the queen The story is using a mild expression to refer to something that is disturbing. In this context, “subdue” means “rape.” The king thought that Haman was trying to rape Esther, and he likely said just that. You can show this in your translation if you want to make this clear. Alternate translation: “trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||||
EST 7 8 acc1 figs-parallelism עִמִּ֖י בַּבָּ֑יִת 1 with me, in the house These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine the phrases. However, each one does indicate something slightly different about what a serious offense it would be if Haman actually were trying to rape Esther. It would be a violation of the king’s personal trust and a violation of the trust implicit in hospitality. So you can also include both phrases. Alternate translation: “in my presence and in my own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
EST 7 8 adq6 figs-idiom הַדָּבָ֗ר יָצָא֙ מִפִּ֣י הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The word was going out from the mouth of the king This expression describes the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king said this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ EST 8 1 j9d1 figs-explicit הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הו
|
|||
EST 8 2 m5hz translate-symaction וַיָּ֨סַר הַמֶּ֜לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֗וֹ…וַֽיִּתְּנָ֖הּ לְמָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 the king removed his signet ring … and he gave it to Mordecai Giving the ring to Mordecai showed that Mordecai could now act on the king’s own authority, and it enabled him to do that. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king now gave this ring to Mordecai to show that Mordecai had the power to act on the authority of the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
EST 8 2 acd1 translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֗וֹ 1 signet ring See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the ring that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
EST 8 2 j9d3 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽהָמָ֔ן 1 that he had caused to pass from Haman This means that the king had taken back his signet ring from Haman. He would have done this when he sentenced Haman to death. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king had given Haman the ring that had his official seal on it, but he had taken it back from Haman when he sentenced Haman to death, and the king was wearing it again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 8 2 acd2 figs-events אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽהָמָ֔ן 1 that he had caused to pass from Haman If it is clearer in your language, you can put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
EST 8 2 acd2 figs-events אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽהָמָ֔ן 1 that he had caused to pass from Haman If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
EST 8 2 z5yn figs-explicit וַֽיִּתְּנָ֖הּ לְמָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 and he gave it to Mordecai By giving his signet ring to Mordecai, the king gave Mordecai the authority to write important papers that people would have to obey. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 8 2 acd3 figs-metaphor וַתָּ֧שֶׂם אֶסְתֵּ֛ר אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עַל־בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 Esther placed Mordecai over the house of Haman To place someone over something figuratively means to put them in charge of it. Alternate translation: “Esther appointed Mordecai to be in charge of everything that had belonged to Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 8 2 d2tj figs-metonymy בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 the house of Haman See the explanation of this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman had owned” or “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ EST 8 9 bj5s כִּכְתָבָ֔הּ 1 according to its writing Alternat
|
|||
EST 8 9 j4r7 figs-idiom וְעַ֥ם וָעָ֖ם 1 and people by people This expression means “every people group.” Alternate translation: “and to each ethnic group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 8 9 j4r9 figs-metonymy כִּלְשֹׁנ֑וֹ 1 according to its tongue Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EST 8 9 j5r1 וְאֶ֨ל־הַיְּהוּדִ֔ים כִּכְתָבָ֖ם וְכִלְשׁוֹנָֽם 1 and to the Jews according to their writing and according to their tongue The Jews would have been included among all the people groups in the empire in the phrase “people by people.” So this seems to be saying, “and especially to the Jews.” Verse 11 explains that it was particularly important for the Jews to read the letter because it gave them the right to defend themselves. Alternate translation: “they wrote especially to the Jews in their own script and in their own language”
|
||||
EST 8 10 acg5 וַיִּכְתֹּ֗ב…וַיַּחְתֹּ֖ם 1 And he wrote … and he sealed **He** refers to Mordecai. You can use his name here if that would be clearer in your language.
|
||||
EST 8 10 acg5 וַיִּכְתֹּ֗ב…וַיַּחְתֹּ֖ם 1 And he wrote … and he sealed **He** refers to Mordecai. You can use his name here If it would be misunderstood in your language.
|
||||
EST 8 10 ijp2 figs-metaphor בְּשֵׁם֙ הַמֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹ֔שׁ 1 in the name of King Ahasuerus Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. Alternate translation: “Mordecai wrote with the authority of King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EST 8 10 jf31 figs-explicit וַיַּחְתֹּ֖ם בְּטַבַּ֣עַת הַמֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 and he sealed with the signet ring of the king This means that Mordecai sealed the letters with this ring. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he sealed the letters with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 8 10 yt4j figs-metaphor בְּיַד֩ הָרָצִ֨ים בַּסּוּסִ֜ים 1 by the hand of runners on horses As in [3:13](../03/13.md), **hand** could mean two different things. (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the runners carried the letters in their hands. (2) It could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that runners were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers on horseback delivered the letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ EST 9 17 j69d figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְשִׂמְחָֽה 1 fe
|
|||
EST 9 17 acm6 figs-synecdoche מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה 1 feasting This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. The celebrations must have included more than just eating special meals together, but the story uses those meals to refer to the entire celebrations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
EST 9 18 w531 וְהַיְּהוּדִ֣ים אֲשֶׁר־בְּשׁוּשָׁ֗ן נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 But the Jews who were in Susa assembled themselves Alternate translation: “but the Jews who lived in the capital city of Susa”
|
||||
EST 9 18 acm7 figs-explicit נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 assembled themselves The implication is that they did this to fight against their enemies. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived in Susa joined together to fight against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 9 18 acm8 figs-explicit בִּשְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔וֹ וּבְאַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑וֹ 1 on the thirteenth of it and on the fourteenth of it If it would be clearer, you can say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 9 18 acm8 figs-explicit בִּשְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔וֹ וּבְאַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑וֹ 1 on the thirteenth of it and on the fourteenth of it If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EST 9 18 j73d translate-ordinal בִּשְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔וֹ 1 on the thirteenth of it Alternate translation: “on day 13” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
EST 9 18 j75d translate-ordinal וּבְאַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑וֹ 1 and on the fourteenth of it Alternate translation: “and on day 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
EST 9 18 acm9 figs-metaphor וְנ֗וֹחַ בַּחֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔וֹ וְעָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְשִׂמְחָֽה 1 And they rested on the fifteenth of it, and they made it a day of feasting and rejoicing **Resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they defeated them, and there was no fighting on the fifteenth day. They devoted that day to joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1063,7 +1063,7 @@ EST 10 2 acs2 גְּדֻלַּ֣ת מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 the greatness of Mo
|
|||
EST 10 2 acs3 גִּדְּל֖וֹ 1 made him great See how you translated this phrase in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “had promoted him”
|
||||
EST 10 2 acs4 figs-rquestion הֲלוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים עַל־סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַיָּמִ֔ים לְמַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּפָרָֽס 1 are they not written in the book of the events of days of the kings of Persia and Media? This is actually a statement. The question form is used to emphasize the certainty of the statement. If questions are not used this way in your language, then use a statement instead, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
EST 10 2 acs5 figs-activepassive הֲלוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 are they not written…? You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The king’s scribes made a record…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
EST 10 2 acs6 הֲלוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 are they not written…? Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse if that would be clearer in your language.
|
||||
EST 10 2 acs6 הֲלוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 are they not written…? Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse If it would be misunderstood in your language.
|
||||
EST 10 2 acs7 figs-idiom סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַיָּמִ֔ים לְמַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּפָרָֽס 1 the book of the events of days for the kings of Media and Persia See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
EST 10 3 j159 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 For This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
EST 10 3 acs8 figs-distinguish הַיְּהוּדִ֗י 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ OBA 1 1 jdr9 figs-quotations ק֛וּמוּ וְנָק֥וּמָה עָלֶי
|
|||
OBA 1 1 pez6 figs-idiom ק֛וּמוּ 1 Get up This phrase is used to tell people to get ready, in this case to attack Edom. Alternate translation: “Get ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
OBA 1 1 iaok figs-idiom וְנָק֥וּמָה עָלֶיהָ 1 This is an idiom that means to violently oppose another person or nation. Alternate translation: “Let us gather our armies against Edom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
OBA 1 1 c9e2 figs-metonymy וְנָק֥וּמָה עָלֶיהָ 1 and let us rise up against her Here, **her** refers to the land of Edom, which, again, stands for the people of Edom. Alternate translation: “Let us rise up against the people of Edom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
OBA 1 1 jd1r figs-abstractnouns לַמִּלְחָמָֽה 1 for battle If it is clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **battle** with a verb. Alternate translation: “to attack her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
OBA 1 1 jd1r figs-abstractnouns לַמִּלְחָמָֽה 1 for battle If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **battle** with a verb. Alternate translation: “to attack her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
OBA 1 2 cc3h writing-quotations הִנֵּ֥ה קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖יךָ 1 Behold, I am making you small The addressee changes here. This is no longer Yahweh speaking to Judah or the messenger speaking to the other nations. Now Yahweh is speaking directly to the people of Edom. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could add a quote introduction here, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
|
||||
OBA 1 2 npn6 הִנֵּ֥ה 1 Behold This alerts the people of Edom to pay special attention to what follows. Use a natural way of getting someone’s attention in your language. Alternate translation: “Look” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
|
||||
OBA 1 2 l6dc figs-parallelism קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖יךָ בַּגּוֹיִ֑ם בָּז֥וּי אַתָּ֖ה מְאֹֽד 1 I am making you small among the nations, you are extremely despised These two phrases mean similar things and are used together to emphasize that Edom will lose its important status. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine them as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ OBA 1 2 ec8m figs-metaphor קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖יךָ בַּגּ
|
|||
OBA 1 2 ch1u figs-activepassive בָּז֥וּי אַתָּ֖ה מְאֹֽד 1 you are extremely despised You could state this in the active form. Alternate translation: “the people of other nations will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
OBA 1 3 kjbt figs-personification זְד֤וֹן לִבְּךָ֙ הִשִּׁיאֶ֔ךָ 1 Here, **pride** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could deceive someone. If this is not clear, you could say this with plain language.<br>Alternate translation: “Because you are so proud, you have deceived yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
OBA 1 3 hzdk figs-youcrowd זְד֤וֹן לִבְּךָ֙ הִשִּׁיאֶ֔ךָ 1 Here, **you** is singular, since it refers to the people of Edom as a single nation, but if this is confusing in your language, you can use a plural form of “you” here and throughout this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
|
||||
OBA 1 3 kcc3 figs-abstractnouns זְד֤וֹן לִבְּךָ֙ 1 If it is clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **pride** with the adjective “proud.” Alternate translation: “Your proud attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
OBA 1 3 kcc3 figs-abstractnouns זְד֤וֹן לִבְּךָ֙ 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **pride** with the adjective “proud.” Alternate translation: “Your proud attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
OBA 1 3 qpw7 figs-metaphor זְד֤וֹן לִבְּךָ֙ 1 of your heart Here, **heart** is used figuratively to refer to a person’s thoughts and feelings.<br>Alternate translation: “Your proud attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
OBA 1 3 k9sw figs-123person שֹׁכְנִ֥י בְחַגְוֵי־סֶּ֖לַע 1 lofty in his dwelling Here, the pronoun switches from **you** to **he** even though Yahweh is still talking to the people of Edom. If this is confusing in your language, you can continue to use **you**, since this is part of Yahweh’s continuing message to the people of Edom. Alternate translation: “you who live in the clefts of the rock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
OBA 1 3 q6sz בְחַגְוֵי־סֶּ֖לַע 1 in the clefts of the rock This means a place that is protected because it is surrounded by rocks.
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ OBA 1 7 rc1i figs-aside אֵ֥ין תְּבוּנָ֖ה בּֽוֹ 1 There is
|
|||
OBA 1 7 jd17 figs-abstractnouns אֵ֥ין תְּבוּנָ֖ה בּֽוֹ 1 understanding You could translate the abstract noun **understanding** with a verb. Alternate translation: “He does not understand anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
OBA 1 7 jd19 figs-personification בּֽוֹ 1 in him Here, **him** probably refers to Edom, which represents the people who live there. Alternate translation: “in the people of Edom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
OBA 1 8 i4rg figs-rquestion הֲל֛וֹא בַּיּ֥וֹם הַה֖וּא…וְהַאֲבַדְתִּ֤י חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽאֱד֔וֹם 1 Will I not on that day (a declaration of Yahweh) destroy wise men from Edom, and understanding from the mountain of Esau? This is a rhetorical question. Yahweh uses the question form here to emphasize that he will certainly do this. Alternate translation: “On that day … I will certainly destroy the wise men from Edom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
OBA 1 8 jd21 figs-explicit וְהַאֲבַדְתִּ֤י חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽאֱד֔וֹם 1 wise men The original audience would have known that Edom was famous for its wisdom. So this means that even their famous wisdom cannot save them from Yahweh’s destruction. If it would be clearer, you could indicate this information as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 8 jd21 figs-explicit וְהַאֲבַדְתִּ֤י חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽאֱד֔וֹם 1 wise men The original audience would have known that Edom was famous for its wisdom. So this means that even their famous wisdom cannot save them from Yahweh’s destruction. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate this information as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 8 i6ry figs-rquestion וּתְבוּנָ֖ה מֵהַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו 1 This is the second part of the rhetorical question. You could also start a new sentence here. Yahweh continues the question form here to emphasize that he will certainly do this. Alternate translation: “and I will certainly destroy their understanding” or “On that day I will certainly remove understanding from the mountain of Esau” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
OBA 1 8 mupa figs-explicit וּתְבוּנָ֖ה מֵהַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו 1 In this poetic style, the reader is expected to use the words **will I not on that day destroy** from the first rhetorical question in order to understand this second one. If that is not clear in your language, you can repeat those words here. Alternate translation: “and will I not on that day destroy understanding from the mountain of Esau?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 8 g6se figs-parallelism חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽאֱד֔וֹם וּתְבוּנָ֖ה מֵהַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו 1 In this poetic style, the same meaning is expressed twice but in different words in order to emphasize what is being said. Here, **wise men** and **understanding** both refer to people who are wise, and **Edom** and **the mountain of Esau** are both ways of referring to the country of Edom. If this is confusing in your language, you could say this only once, or emphasize the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “all people who are wise from the country of Edom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ OBA 1 15 crs9 קָר֥וֹב 1 near upon In this context, **near** means “clo
|
|||
OBA 1 15 rd8g figs-activepassive יֵעָ֣שֶׂה לָּ֔ךְ 1 According to what you have done, it will be done to you If you prefer an active verb you can use one here and you can specify who will do this action. Alternate translation: “I will do those same things to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
OBA 1 15 djk9 figs-metaphor גְּמֻלְךָ֖ יָשׁ֥וּב בְּרֹאשֶֽׁךָ 1 your recompense will return This is a metaphor that pictures the Edomites as having sent bad things out to others, and now those things are going to come back and hurt them as they land on their heads. Alternate translation: “those same things will soon happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
OBA 1 15 cr3s figs-synecdoche בְּרֹאשֶֽׁךָ 1 on your own head The **head** is being used to represent the whole person. Alternate translation: “to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
OBA 1 16 nf6s figs-explicit כִּ֗י כַּֽאֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙ 1 For according to how you drank As at the beginning of verse 15, here also the connecting word **For** indicates that this is a reason why the people of Edom should have helped the Israelites instead of joining in attacking them. Here also Yahweh describes how he will soon judge all nations for the way that they have treated others. There are two possibilities for how you can make this explicit, if that would be clearer in your language. Choosing between these possibilities depends on how you interpret the referent of the word **you**. The word **you** here is masculine plural, the first and only time it occurs in this form in the book. Throughout the book, the nation of Edom was addressed with the masculine singular form. This is also the last occurrence of the second person in the book. (1) Because of these observations, the use of drinking here and throughout the Bible as a metaphor for suffering punishment, and the location of this suffering on Mount Zion in Jerusalem, it seems that here Obadiah stops addressing the people of Edom and returns to addressing the people of Israel. At the beginning of the book, Obadiah included the people of Israel when he said, “We have heard a report from Yahweh.” Now, near the end of the book, he addresses them again, giving them assurance that the people of Edom will be punished for what they did to the people of Israel. See the UST. (2) This word **you** could refer to the people of Edom. Alternate translation: “You should have helped the people of Israel, because just as you drank” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 16 nf6s figs-explicit כִּ֗י כַּֽאֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙ 1 For according to how you drank As at the beginning of verse 15, here also the connecting word **For** indicates that this is a reason why the people of Edom should have helped the Israelites instead of joining in attacking them. Here also Yahweh describes how he will soon judge all nations for the way that they have treated others. There are two possibilities for how you can make this explicit, If it would be misunderstood in your language. Choosing between these possibilities depends on how you interpret the referent of the word **you**. The word **you** here is masculine plural, the first and only time it occurs in this form in the book. Throughout the book, the nation of Edom was addressed with the masculine singular form. This is also the last occurrence of the second person in the book. (1) Because of these observations, the use of drinking here and throughout the Bible as a metaphor for suffering punishment, and the location of this suffering on Mount Zion in Jerusalem, it seems that here Obadiah stops addressing the people of Edom and returns to addressing the people of Israel. At the beginning of the book, Obadiah included the people of Israel when he said, “We have heard a report from Yahweh.” Now, near the end of the book, he addresses them again, giving them assurance that the people of Edom will be punished for what they did to the people of Israel. See the UST. (2) This word **you** could refer to the people of Edom. Alternate translation: “You should have helped the people of Israel, because just as you drank” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 16 cr9s writing-pronouns כַּֽאֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙ 1 according to how you have drunk Throughout the book of Obadiah, the nation of Edom is addressed with a masculine singular form of “you.” (The one feminine plural form in [verse 13](../01/13.md) only addresses the women of Edom). Here, however, **you** is masculine plural. There are two possibilities for who is being addressed here. (1) It refers to the people of Israel. This would explain the shift from singular to plural. Just as Obadiah addressed the people of Israel in the plural in [verse 1](../01/01.md), so he addresses them in the plural now. This interpretation also fits with the metaphor used here and throughout the Bible that pictures suffering and divine punishment as drinking something that makes a person stagger, fall, and die. The people of Israel suffered and died in Jerusalem when the city was destroyed. This also allows the comparison in this verse to fit with the idea in the previous verse that Edom will suffer in the same way that they made Israel to suffer. See the UST. (2) It refers to the people of Edom. In this case, the comparison is between how the people of Edom literally drank wine in celebration of Jerusalem’s destruction with how the nations will metaphorically drink God’s punishment. Either that, or the verb must be forced into a future meaning, and the comparison is between how God will punish the people of Edom in Jerusalem and how God will punish all the nations. Alternate translation: “just as I will punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
OBA 1 16 cr7s figs-metaphor שְׁתִיתֶם֙ 1 according to how you have drunk The image of drinking something is often used in the Bible as a metaphor for suffering or for being punished by God. Alternate translation: “you suffered” or “I punished you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
OBA 1 16 ujj9 figs-metonymy עַל־הַ֣ר קָדְשִׁ֔י 1 the mountain of my holiness The **mountain of my holiness** refers to Mount Zion and therefore to the city of Jerusalem. So here Jerusalem is being referred to by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. Alternate translation: “in my holy city, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ OBA 1 18 yt8j figs-metonymy וּבֵ֤ית עֵשָׂו֙…לְבֵ֣ית
|
|||
OBA 1 18 cr19 figs-metaphor אֵ֜שׁ…לֶהָבָ֗ה…לְקַ֔שׁ 1 fire, flame, stubble In this metaphor, Yahweh is saying that the Israelites will be like fire and flame, that the people of Edom will be like dry grass, and that the Israelites will do to the people of Edom what fire and flame do to dry grass. In other words, just as fire and flame burn up dry grass until it is all gone, the Israelites who survive will conquer all of Edom. If this metaphor is not clear in your language, you could make it a simile, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
OBA 1 18 hj8x translate-unknown לְקַ֔שׁ 1 stubble The word **stubble** means the dry pieces of plants that are left in the ground after their stalks have been cut. Alternate translation: “like dry grass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
OBA 1 18 cr23 figs-doublet וְדָלְק֥וּ בָהֶ֖ם וַאֲכָל֑וּם 1 And they will burn them, and consume them **Burn** and **consume** mean almost the same thing. Yahweh uses the words together to intensify the meaning. If you do not have two similar words in your language or if it would be confusing to say this twice, you can combine them into one phrase and intensify the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “and they will burn them until they are all burned up” or “and they will burn them up completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
OBA 1 18 amum figs-explicit כִּ֥י 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason for what came before. Yahweh is reminding the reader that these things will certainly happen, because this message comes from him. If that would be clearer in your language, you can say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 18 amum figs-explicit כִּ֥י 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason for what came before. Yahweh is reminding the reader that these things will certainly happen, because this message comes from him. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 18 c5jr figs-123person כִּ֥י יְהוָ֖ה דִּבֵּֽר 1 for Yahweh has spoken Yahweh is speaking of himself in the third person here. If that is confusing in your language, you can change it to first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
OBA 1 19 cr25 וְיָרְשׁ֨וּ 1 And they … will possess … And they will possess This verse as a whole describes people who live in different parts of Israel conquering the territories next to them. Alternate translation: “will conquer”
|
||||
OBA 1 19 zu8p figs-metonymy הַנֶּ֜גֶב 1 The **Negev** is the name of the southern region of Judea that is dry, rocky, and barren. It is being used to represent the people who live there. The people are being described by the name of something closely associated with them, the land that they live in. Alternate translation: “The Israelites who live in the Negev” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ OBA 1 20 u5t1 grammar-collectivenouns וְגָלֻ֥ת יְרוּשָׁלַ֖
|
|||
OBA 1 20 x6yt translate-names בִּסְפָרַ֑ד 1 Sepharad **Sepharad** is the name of a place whose location is unknown to modern scholars. Some experts suggest that it refers to the city of Sardis in the region of Lydia. This would be in Asia Minor, northwest of Israel, in what is now the country of Turkey. Alternate translation: “currently live in Sepharad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
OBA 1 20 cr39 figs-explicit יִֽרְשׁ֕וּ 1 they will possess In order to conquer the **cities of the Negev**, these exiles first will return from the distant lands where they are living. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they will come back and conquer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
OBA 1 20 cr41 translate-names הַנֶּֽגֶב 1 the Negev The **Negev** is the name of the southern region of Judea that is dry, rocky, and barren. See how you translated this in [verse 19](../01/19.md) Alternate translation: “the southern Judean wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
OBA 1 21 j7nf figs-metonymy וְעָל֤וּ מֽוֹשִׁעִים֙ בְּהַ֣ר צִיּ֔וֹן לִשְׁפֹּ֖ט אֶת־הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֑ו 1 And saviors will go up to the mountain of Zion to judge the mountain of Esau Even though **the mountain of Zion** is a figurative name for Jerusalem, it would be good to keep the imagery of this high place in Jerusalem where God’s temple was, if possible. This would also allow the comparison with **the mountain of Esau**. Edom had boasted that it was up high and that no one could bring it down. But with this figurative imagery, Yahweh is saying that he will bring it down and place his own people up high instead. You can also choose to express this meaning in plain language if that would be clearer and if that is how you have been translating the book. Alternate translation: “Israel’s saviors will go up to Jerusalem and will rule over Edom, who thought that they were so high, from up there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
OBA 1 21 j7nf figs-metonymy וְעָל֤וּ מֽוֹשִׁעִים֙ בְּהַ֣ר צִיּ֔וֹן לִשְׁפֹּ֖ט אֶת־הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֑ו 1 And saviors will go up to the mountain of Zion to judge the mountain of Esau Even though **the mountain of Zion** is a figurative name for Jerusalem, it would be good to keep the imagery of this high place in Jerusalem where God’s temple was, if possible. This would also allow the comparison with **the mountain of Esau**. Edom had boasted that it was up high and that no one could bring it down. But with this figurative imagery, Yahweh is saying that he will bring it down and place his own people up high instead. You can also choose to express this meaning in plain language if that is how you have been translating the book and if **the mountain of Zion** would be misunderstood. Alternate translation: “Israel’s saviors will go up to Jerusalem and will rule over Edom, who thought that they were so high, from up there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
OBA 1 21 hyg2 מֽוֹשִׁעִים֙ 1 saviors Here, **saviors** refers to Israelite military leaders whom God will use to defeat the nation of Edom. Alternate translation: “the leaders who have saved Israel”
|
||||
OBA 1 21 cr43 figs-metonymy בְּהַ֣ר צִיּ֔וֹן 1 the mountain of Zion Yahweh is referring to Jerusalem figuratively by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. See how you translated this in verses 16 and 17. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
OBA 1 21 cr45 figs-synecdoche הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֑ו 1 the mountain of Esau This phrase refers to the mountainous territory where Esau, the brother of Jacob and the ancestor of the Edomites, went and settled. So it means “the hill country that came to belong to Esau and his descendants.” See how you translated this in verses 8, 9, and 19. Alternate translation: “the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ LUK 1 59 ya7d figs-explicit ἦλθον περιτεμεῖν τὸ παιδίο
|
|||
LUK 1 59 ip8w figs-idiom ἐκάλουν αὐτὸ ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, Ζαχαρίαν 1 they were going to call him after the name of his father, Zechariah As in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:31](../01/31.md), to **call** the name of a child is an idiom meaning to give a child a name. Alternate translation: “they were going to give him the same name as his father, Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
LUK 1 60 l077 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεῖσα ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ εἶπεν 1 answering his mother said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that John’s mother responded to the intention of her family and friends to name the baby Zechariah. Alternate translation: “his mother responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||||
LUK 1 60 l078 figs-activepassive κληθήσεται 1 he will be called If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “we are going to name him John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
LUK 1 61 t4e7 figs-explicit οὐδείς ἐστιν ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, ὃς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 There is no one among your relatives who is called by this name The expression **this name** means specifically the name John. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could put the actual name in your translation. Alternate translation: “None of your relatives is named John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 1 61 t4e7 figs-explicit οὐδείς ἐστιν ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, ὃς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 There is no one among your relatives who is called by this name The expression **this name** means specifically the name John. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put the actual name in your translation. Alternate translation: “None of your relatives is named John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 1 61 l079 figs-activepassive καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 is called by this name If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “has the name John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
LUK 1 62 ium2 figs-explicit ἐνένευον…τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 they made signs to his father Zechariah may have been unable both to speak and to hear, but Gabriel only told him that he would be unable to speak, so it is more likely that the people simply assumed he could not hear because he was not speaking. If you think your readers might wonder why the people made signs to Zechariah, you could offer an explanation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah was not speaking, the people thought he could not hear either, so they made signs to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 1 62 w3kq figs-activepassive τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό 1 as to what he wanted him to be called If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “to ask him what name he wanted to give the baby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ LUK 4 21 b1ix figs-activepassive πεπλήρωται ἡ Γραφὴ αὕτη
|
|||
LUK 4 21 iij8 figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς ὠσὶν ὑμῶν 1 in your ears In this expression, the **ears** figuratively represent people in the act of listening. Alternate translation: “even as you are listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
LUK 4 22 k2xi figs-metonymy τοῖς λόγοις τῆς χάριτος 1 the gracious words Luke uses the term **words** figuratively to describe what Jesus said by reference to something associated with it, the words he used to communicate it. Alternate translation: “the articulate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
LUK 4 22 l219 figs-explicitinfo τοῖς λόγοις…τοῖς ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 the … words that were coming out of his mouth In your language, this phrase might seem like an unnecessarily elaborate way of speaking. If so, you can express the same idea more compactly. Alternate translation: “the … things he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||||
LUK 4 22 ty6d figs-rquestion οὐχὶ υἱός ἐστιν Ἰωσὴφ οὗτος? 1 Is this not the son of Joseph? The people were making a statement, not asking a question. They did not expect others to verify for them who Jesus’ father was. Instead, they were using the question form to say how amazed they were. Joseph was not a religious leader, so they were surprised that his son would preach as well as he did. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This is just Joseph’s son!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 4 22 ty6d figs-rquestion οὐχὶ υἱός ἐστιν Ἰωσὴφ οὗτος? 1 Is this not the son of Joseph? The people were making a statement, not asking a question. They did not expect others to verify for them who Jesus’ father was. Instead, they were using the question form to say how amazed they were. Joseph was not a religious leader, so they were surprised that his son would preach as well as he did. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This is just Joseph’s son!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 4 23 l220 figs-quotesinquotes πάντως ἐρεῖτέ μοι τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, ἰατρέ, θεράπευσον σεαυτόν; ὅσα ἠκούσαμεν γενόμενα εἰς τὴν Καφαρναοὺμ, ποίησον καὶ ὧδε ἐν τῇ πατρίδι σου 1 Surely you will say this proverb to me, ‘Doctor, heal yourself. Whatever we heard that happened in Capernaum, also do here in your hometown’ If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Surely you will quote the proverb to me that tells a doctor to heal himself, to ask me to do the same things here in my hometown that you heard happened in Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
LUK 4 23 u4ps writing-proverbs ἰατρέ, θεράπευσον σεαυτόν 1 Doctor, heal yourself Jesus anticipates that the people will want to see him do miracles to prove his credibility. He uses a short popular saying of the culture to express this. This saying expresses a great deal of meaning in a few words. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could expand it to make clear to your readers what it means. Alternate translation: “If a doctor cannot heal himself of a certain disease, then people will not believe that he can heal them of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
|
||||
LUK 4 23 ww1w figs-explicit ὅσα ἠκούσαμεν γενόμενα εἰς τὴν Καφαρναοὺμ, ποίησον καὶ ὧδε ἐν τῇ πατρίδι σου 1 Whatever we heard that happened in Capernaum, also do here in your hometown Jesus then explains how the short saying applies to this situation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explicitly state the implications of his explanation. Alternate translation: “We will not believe the things you say unless you can do the same kind of miracles here that we heard you did in Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ LUK 4 35 l236 figs-activepassive φιμώθητι 1 Be silenced If it would be m
|
|||
LUK 4 35 me6n ἔξελθε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 come out of him Jesus is commanding the demon to stop controlling the man. Alternate translation: “leave him alone” or “do not live in this man any longer”
|
||||
LUK 4 36 l237 figs-personification ἐγένετο θάμβος ἐπὶ πάντας 1 astonishment came upon everyone Luke speaks figuratively of **astonishment** as if it were something that actively **came upon** the people. Alternate translation: “they were all amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
LUK 4 36 l238 figs-metonymy τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 What is this word Luke uses the term **word** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “What is this teaching” or “What is this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
LUK 4 36 h7wx figs-rquestion τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 What is this word? The people are making a statement, not asking a question. They do not expect anyone to explain what Jesus’ teaching is. Instead, they are using the question form to express how amazed they are that Jesus has the authority to command demons to leave a person. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “This is a powerful message!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 4 36 h7wx figs-rquestion τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 What is this word? The people are making a statement, not asking a question. They do not expect anyone to explain what Jesus’ teaching is. Instead, they are using the question form to express how amazed they are that Jesus has the authority to command demons to leave a person. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “This is a powerful message!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 4 36 dgz3 figs-doublet ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ καὶ δυνάμει ἐπιτάσσει τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις πνεύμασιν 1 he commands the unclean spirits with authority and power The words **authority** and **power** mean similar things. The people use the two terms together to emphasize what great control Jesus has over unclean spirits. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these terms in a single phrase that would similarly express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “he has complete authority over the unclean spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
LUK 4 37 q25f writing-endofstory καὶ ἐξεπορεύετο ἦχος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 And news about him went out This is a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
LUK 4 37 l239 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -796,11 +796,11 @@ LUK 5 21 l256 translate-unknown οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 the scribes Here a
|
|||
LUK 5 21 l257 translate-names οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees **Pharisees** is the name of an important and powerful group of Jewish religious leaders in Jesus’ time. The name occurs many times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
LUK 5 21 ie5h figs-explicit διαλογίζεσθαι 1 to debate These men were not debating or arguing out loud, since the next verse shows that this was rather something they were thinking. So this implicitly means that they were wondering. Alternate translation: “to wonder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 5 21 l258 figs-quotemarks λέγοντες 1 saying Luke uses the word **saying** to introduce his quotation of what the religious leaders were thinking. If you indicate the quotation in some other way, such as with quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, you do not need to represent this word in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
LUK 5 21 a86c figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ὃς λαλεῖ βλασφημίας? 1 Who is this who speaks blasphemies? These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view, he would be speaking **blasphemies**. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man is speaking blasphemies!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 5 21 a86c figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ὃς λαλεῖ βλασφημίας? 1 Who is this who speaks blasphemies? These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view, he would be speaking **blasphemies**. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man is speaking blasphemies!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 5 21 s21n figs-rquestion τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας εἰ μὴ μόνος ὁ Θεός? 1 Who can forgive sins but God alone? Once again the religious leaders are using a question form for emphasis, and you can translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one can forgive sins but God alone!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 5 22 z4k5 figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς…τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς αὐτῶν 1 knowing their thoughts This phrase indicates that they were reasoning silently, so the implication is that Jesus sensed what they were thinking. Alternate translation: “sensing what they were thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 5 22 l259 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς 1 answering said to them Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what the religious leaders were thinking. Alternate translation: “responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||||
LUK 5 22 et8f figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? 1 Why are you debating in your hearts? Jesus does not expect the religious leaders to explain why they are thinking these things. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that they should not be thinking them. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be thinking these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 5 22 et8f figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? 1 Why are you debating in your hearts? Jesus does not expect the religious leaders to explain why they are thinking these things. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that they should not be thinking them. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be thinking these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 5 22 p2hj figs-metaphor διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 debating in your hearts The term **hearts** figuratively represents the thoughts of these people. Alternate translation: “are you thinking these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
LUK 5 23 zid2 figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν, ἀφέωνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ περιπάτει? 1 Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk?’ Jesus is using the form of a question in order to teach. He wants to make the scribes and Pharisees reflect on the situation and realize something. There are many implications. For example, these religious leaders may take the question in the sense, “Which is easier to get away with saying?” The answer would be, “Your sins are forgiven,” because people don’t expect visual proof of that, whereas if someone says, “Get up and walk,” and nothing happens, that proves the speaker doesn’t have the power to heal. Jesus likely intends the question in a different sense: “Which is the easier way to deal with a situation like this?” It appears that the man’s sickness has something to do with his sins, because Jesus forgives them. In such a situation, it would not be sufficient to say, “Get up and walk,” since that would address the effect but not the cause. To say, “Your sins are forgiven,” would deal with both the cause and the effect, so that would be the easier way to deal with the situation. There are many other implications that could also be drawn out as well—too many to include in the text of a translation. Since the question form is intrinsic to Jesus’ teaching method, you may wish simply to retain it in your translation. However, to show that he is teaching, not asking for information, you could introduce his question with a phrase that indicates its purpose. Alternate translation: “Think about this. Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk'?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 5 23 l260 figs-quotesinquotes τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν, ἀφέωνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ περιπάτει? 1 Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk?’ If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven, or to tell him to get up and walk?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ LUK 6 2 z32z figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν τ
|
|||
LUK 6 2 m76z figs-explicit τί ποιεῖτε ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν? 1 Why are you doing what is not lawful on the Sabbath? The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. You could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 6 2 dum1 figs-you τί ποιεῖτε 1 Why are you doing Here, **you** is plural. It refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||||
LUK 6 3 l281 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 answering them, Jesus said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the objection that the Pharisees raised. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||||
LUK 6 3 vih6 figs-rquestion οὐδὲ τοῦτο ἀνέγνωτε, ὃ ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ ὅτε ἐπείνασεν αὐτὸς, καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ ὄντες 1 Have you not read this, what David did when he was hungry, he and those who were with him Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the Scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Scriptures suggest otherwise, in the passage that tells what David did when he and those who were with him were hungry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 6 3 vih6 figs-rquestion οὐδὲ τοῦτο ἀνέγνωτε, ὃ ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ ὅτε ἐπείνασεν αὐτὸς, καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ ὄντες 1 Have you not read this, what David did when he was hungry, he and those who were with him Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the Scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Scriptures suggest otherwise, in the passage that tells what David did when he and those who were with him were hungry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 6 4 l282 ὡς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 how he entered into the house of God If you made the first part of the quotation in [6:3](../06/03.md) a separate sentence, begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He entered into the house of God”
|
||||
LUK 6 4 l283 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the **house of God**. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
LUK 6 4 yyh2 translate-unknown τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the bread of the presence The phrase **the bread of the presence** refers to loaves of bread that were placed on a table in the temple as an offering to God. They represented how the people of Israel lived in the **presence** of God. Alternate translation: “the bread that was offered to God” or “the bread that showed God lived among the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ LUK 6 39 f4xj figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνο
|
|||
LUK 6 40 ipr9 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον 1 A disciple is not above his teacher The word **above** creates a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “A disciple is not better than his teacher” or “A disciple is not greater than his teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
LUK 6 40 l324 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον 1 A disciple is not above his teacher If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what this implicitly means. Alternate translation: “A disciple does not know more than his teacher” or “A disciple is not wiser than his teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 6 40 a6ym figs-activepassive κατηρτισμένος…πᾶς 1 everyone having been fully trained If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “every disciple whose teacher has fully taught him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
LUK 6 41 l7vj figs-rquestion τί…βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ οὐ κατανοεῖς? 1 why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother, but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye? Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not look at the speck in your brother’s eye while ignoring the log in your own eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 6 41 l7vj figs-rquestion τί…βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ οὐ κατανοεῖς? 1 why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother, but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye? Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not look at the speck in your brother’s eye while ignoring the log in your own eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 6 41 jpt3 figs-metaphor τί…βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “you should not criticize the less important faults of a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
LUK 6 41 l325 figs-youcrowd βλέπεις…σου…τῷ ἰδίῳ…οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 you look … your … you do not notice … your own Even though Jesus is still speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation here, so **you** and **your** are singular in this verse. But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you can use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
|
||||
LUK 6 41 j1r5 translate-unknown τὸ κάρφος 1 the speck of wood If your readers would not be familiar with **wood**, in your translation you can use a phrase that describes the smallest thing that commonly falls into a person’s eyes in your culture, or you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the grain of sand” or “the tiny object” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ LUK 6 41 ssu3 figs-metaphor τὴν δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδ
|
|||
LUK 6 41 l327 figs-hyperbole τὴν…δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ 1 the log that is in your own eye A log could not literally go into a person’s eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize his point and make it memorable. Alternate translation: “your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
LUK 6 41 h9a4 translate-unknown δοκὸν 1 the log You could translate this with the term for the kind of long, large piece of **wood** that people in your culture would encounter. Or if your readers would not be familiar with **wood**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “beam” or “plank” or “large object” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
LUK 6 42 l345 figs-youcrowd πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου 1 How can you say to your brother Jesus is speaking to his disciples and the crowd, but he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular here. (The terms **you**, **your**, and **yourself** are also singular throughout the rest of this verse, because either Jesus is addressing an individual situation, or one person is addressing another in fictional dialogue.) If the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you can use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
|
||||
LUK 6 42 rkk6 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν 1 How can you say Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool, not to ask for information. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 6 42 rkk6 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν 1 How can you say Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool, not to ask for information. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 6 42 l346 figs-metaphor τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, ἀδελφέ, ἄφες 1 to your brother, ‘Brother, let me’ The term **brother** figuratively means a fellow believer in Jesus. So in its first instance here, you could translate the term the way you did in [6:41](../06/41.md). But since it is realistic that in dialogue one believer might address another believer as **Brother** or “Sister,” you could retain the figurative term in its second instance. Alternate translation: “to a fellow believer, ‘Brother,’ or ‘Sister, let’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
LUK 6 42 l328 figs-metaphor ἄφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σου 1 let me take out the speck of wood that is in your eye This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “let me help you correct some of your faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
LUK 6 42 l329 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς τὴν ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ δοκὸν οὐ βλέπων 1 you yourself do not see the log that is in your own eye This phrase is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “you yourself are not correcting your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ LUK 11 39 xf4e figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς οἱ Φαρισαῖοι τὸ ἔξ
|
|||
LUK 11 39 zkq7 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς…τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τοῦ πίνακος καθαρίζετε 1 you … clean the outside of the cup and of the bowl Washing of the outside of containers was a part of the ritual practices of the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “as part of your rituals, you … always clean the things that you are going to eat and drink from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 11 39 b8gj figs-abstractnouns τὸ δὲ ἔσωθεν ὑμῶν γέμει ἁρπαγῆς καὶ πονηρίας 1 but the inside of you is full of greed and evil If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **greed** and **evil** with adjectives, as UST does. Alternate translation: “but your true character is that you are greedy and wicked people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
LUK 11 40 zq4l figs-nominaladj ἄφρονες 1 You foolish ones Jesus is using an adjective as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “You foolish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||||
LUK 11 40 g39h figs-rquestion οὐχ ὁ ποιήσας τὸ ἔξωθεν, καὶ τὸ ἔσωθεν ἐποίησεν? 1 Did not the one who made the outside also make the inside? Jesus is using the question form to challenge and correct the Pharisees. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “The one who made the outside also made the inside!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 11 40 g39h figs-rquestion οὐχ ὁ ποιήσας τὸ ἔξωθεν, καὶ τὸ ἔσωθεν ἐποίησεν? 1 Did not the one who made the outside also make the inside? Jesus is using the question form to challenge and correct the Pharisees. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “The one who made the outside also made the inside!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
LUK 11 41 m3ww figs-explicit τὰ ἐνόντα δότε ἐλεημοσύνην 1 give as charity what is inside Jesus assumes that the Pharisees will know that he is now referring literally to the cups and bowls because he wants to speak about what they contain. So in this saying, they no longer represent the Pharisees figuratively. Alternate translation: “give to the poor what is in your cups and bowls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
LUK 11 41 l705 figs-metonymy τὰ ἐνόντα δότε ἐλεημοσύνην 1 give as charity what is inside Jesus is referring to food by association with the cups and bowls that the food is **inside**. Alternate translation: “share your food with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
LUK 11 41 l706 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Jesus uses the term **behold** to get the Pharisees to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
|
|
@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ EPH 1 3 m8qh πάσῃ εὐλογίᾳ πνευματικῇ 1 every spiritual
|
|||
EPH 1 3 j2lk ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 in the heavenly places “in the supernatural world.” The word **heavenly** refers to the place where God is.
|
||||
EPH 1 3 v9qz figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 in Christ Here, **in Christ** could mean: (1) a metaphor referring to our close relationship with Christ. Alternate translation: “by uniting us with Christ” or “because we are united with Christ” (2) what Christ has done. Alternate translation: “through Christ” or “through what Christ has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
EPH 1 4 ibv6 figs-doublet ἁγίους καὶ ἀμώμους 1 holy and blameless Paul uses these two similar words to emphasize moral goodness. If your language does not have two similar words, you can use one word for both, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
EPH 1 4 ab01 figs-doublenegatives ἀμώμους 1 blameless The word **blameless** contains two negative ideas: “blame” or “fault,” and “-less,” which means “without.” If it is clearer in your language, the two negative ideas can be replaced with the corresponding positive idea, “perfect.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
EPH 1 4 ab01 figs-doublenegatives ἀμώμους 1 blameless The word **blameless** contains two negative ideas: “blame” or “fault,” and “-less,” which means “without.” If it would be misunderstood in your language, the two negative ideas can be replaced with the corresponding positive idea, “perfect.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
EPH 1 5 fp7l 0 General Information: The words “his,” “He,” and “he” refer to God.
|
||||
EPH 1 5 h7pn figs-exclusive προορίσας ἡμᾶς εἰς υἱοθεσίαν 1 he predestined us for adoption The word **us** refers to Paul, the Ephesian church, and all believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “God planned long ago to adopt us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
EPH 1 5 pq1x προορίσας ἡμᾶς 1 he predestined us “God chose us ahead of time” or “God chose us long ago”
|
||||
|
|
@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ EPH 6 19 gu1n figs-metonymy ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόματός μου 1 I
|
|||
EPH 6 20 wx9k figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ οὗ πρεσβεύω ἐν ἁλύσει 1 for which I am an ambassador in chains The phrase **in chains** is a metonym for being in prison. Alternate translation: “because of which I am now in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
EPH 6 20 pmm2 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐν αὐτῷ παρρησιάσωμαι, ὡς δεῖ με λαλῆσαι 1 so that in it I may speak boldly, as it is necessary for me to speak The word “pray” is understood from verse 18. Alternate translation: “pray that whenever I teach the gospel, I will speak it as boldly as I should” or “pray that I may speak the gospel as boldly as I should” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
EPH 6 20 abep grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 so that The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of the believers praying for Paul is to enable him to preach the gospel boldly even though he is in chains. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
EPH 6 20 cdep figs-pronouns ἐν αὐτῷ 1 in it Here, **it** refers back to the “message” in verse 19 that Paul wants to speak. If it is clearer in your language, you can repeat the word “message” here. Alternate translation: “in my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||||
EPH 6 20 cdep figs-pronouns ἐν αὐτῷ 1 in it Here, **it** refers back to the “message” in verse 19 that Paul wants to speak. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can repeat the word “message” here. Alternate translation: “in my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||||
EPH 6 21 aber grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 so that The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of Paul sending Tychicus to Ephesus was to tell the Ephesian believers what was happening to Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
EPH 6 21 cxs9 translate-names Τυχικὸς 1 Tychicus Tychicus was one of several men who served with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
EPH 6 21 abc2 figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸς 1 brother Paul speaks of Tychicus as if he were a **brother** to all the other believers who were in God’s spiritual family. Alternate translation: “fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1TI 3 3 pc2g figs-metaphor ἀφιλάργυρον 1 not money-loving If the expression **loving** money would not convey the idea of something inappropriate in your language, it might be helpful to use a term that expresses the idea of “greed.” Alternate translation: “not greedy for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 3 4 a8gu προϊστάμενον 1 managing Alternate translations: “he should lead” or “he should take care of”
|
||||
1TI 3 4 w3un ἐν ὑποταγῇ, μετὰ πάσης σεμνότητος 1 in obedience with all honor This could mean: (1) the overseer’s children should obey their father and show respect to him. Alternate translation: “who obey him completely respectfully” (2) the overseer’s children should show respect to everyone. Alternate translation: “who obey him and show respect to everyone” or (3) the overseer should show respect to those in his household as he leads them. Alternate translation: “who obey him as he treats them with respect”
|
||||
1TI 3 5 n5lt figs-rquestion εἰ δέ τις τοῦ ἰδίου οἴκου προστῆναι οὐκ οἶδεν, πῶς ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ ἐπιμελήσεται? 1 for if someone does not know how to manage his own household, how will he take care of the church of God? Paul is making a statement, not actually asking a question. He does not expect Timothy to explain how a man who could not manage his own household could take care of God’s church. Instead, Paul is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for an overseer to demonstrate faithfulness in his personal life before assuming a leadership role in the church. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I say this because a man who is not able to manage his own household will certainly not be able to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
1TI 3 5 n5lt figs-rquestion εἰ δέ τις τοῦ ἰδίου οἴκου προστῆναι οὐκ οἶδεν, πῶς ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ ἐπιμελήσεται? 1 for if someone does not know how to manage his own household, how will he take care of the church of God? Paul is making a statement, not actually asking a question. He does not expect Timothy to explain how a man who could not manage his own household could take care of God’s church. Instead, Paul is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for an overseer to demonstrate faithfulness in his personal life before assuming a leadership role in the church. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I say this because a man who is not able to manage his own household will certainly not be able to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
1TI 3 5 c814 figs-metonymy ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ 1 the church of God Here the term **church** refers to a local group of God’s people, not to a building. Alternate translations: “a group of God’s people” or “a local gathering of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
1TI 3 6 q7hu μὴ νεόφυτον 1 not a new convert Alternate translations: “he should not be still just learning the faith” or “he must be mature from a long, steady growth in the faith”
|
||||
1TI 3 6 t240 figs-explicit τυφωθεὶς 1 puffed up Paul is warning that a new convert might become excessively proud if he were given an important leadership position right away. Alternate translation: “becoming proud of himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1TI 3 7 t245 figs-metaphor παγίδα τοῦ διαβόλου 1 the trap of the devil Paul speaks of the devil tempting someone to sin as if it were a trap that could catch a person. Alternate translation: “so that the devil is not able to tempt him to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 3 8 nz2w διακόνους ὡσαύτως 1 Likewise deacons Alternate translation: “deacons, just like overseers”
|
||||
1TI 3 8 sxq4 figs-metaphor μὴ διλόγους 1 not double-talkers Paul speaks figuratively about some people as if they could say two things at once. Alternate translation: “they should not say one thing but mean something else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 3 8 g5qi figs-doublenegatives μὴ διλόγους 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can state this positively. Alternate translation: “be honest in what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
1TI 3 8 g5qi figs-doublenegatives μὴ διλόγους 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this positively. Alternate translation: “be honest in what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
1TI 3 9 c44a figs-metaphor ἔχοντας 1 holding Paul speaks of true teaching about God as if it were an object that a person could hold. Alternate translation: “they must continue to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 3 9 jda1 figs-abstractnouns τὸ μυστήριον 1 the mystery Paul uses the abstract noun **mystery** to refer to a truth that had existed for some time but that God was revealing at that moment. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with a verb such as “reveal.” Alternate translation: “what God has now revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
1TI 3 9 rfv7 figs-abstractnouns τὸ μυστήριον τῆς πίστεως 1 the mystery of the faith Here, **faith** refers to the content of the **mystery**, that is, the specific things that God has revealed and that followers of Jesus must believe. Alternate translation: “the teachings that God has revealed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1TI 5 25 qlu5 figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα τὰ καλὰ 1 good works The implication is that these works are considered **good** because they are consistent with God’s character, purposes, and will. Alternate translation: “actions that God approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
1TI 5 25 bl51 figs-metaphor καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 and the ones having otherwise are not able to be hidden Paul speaks of good works as if they were objects that someone could hide. Alternate translation: “and people will find out later about even those good deeds that are not obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 5 25 t420 figs-activepassive καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 and the ones having otherwise are not able to be hidden If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “and people who secretly do good works will not be able to hide them forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
1TI 5 25 bb2t figs-doublenegatives κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can say this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “people will learn about later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
1TI 5 25 bb2t figs-doublenegatives κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “people will learn about later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
1TI 6 intro rks4 0 # 1 Timothy 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Slavery<br><br>In this chapter Paul teaches slaves about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving their masters. This does not mean that he is endorsing slavery as a good thing or as something that God approves of. Instead, Paul is encouraging believers to be godly and content in every situation that they are in. This does not mean that they cannot also work to change those situations.
|
||||
1TI 6 1 nm4n figs-metaphor ὅσοι εἰσὶν ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι 1 As many slaves as are under the yoke Paul speaks of people who work as slaves as though they were oxen plowing or pulling with a yoke around their necks. Alternate translation: “concerning people who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 6 1 ep1l figs-explicit ὅσοι εἰσὶν 1 as many … as are The implication in context is that Paul is speaking about believers who are slaves. Alternate translation: “believers who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1TI 6 17 te3z figs-nominaladj τοῖς πλουσίοις 1 the rich Paul is using this adjective as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||||
1TI 6 17 z4ec ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι 1 in the present age The **present age** is the time period in which we are living, before Jesus returns and establishes God’s rule over all people. Alternate translation: “at this time”
|
||||
1TI 6 17 drj6 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πλούτου ἀδηλότητι 1 in the uncertainty of riches If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **uncertainty** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translations: “in riches, which are so uncertain” or “in wealth, which a person can lose so easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
1TI 6 17 iq61 figs-ellipsis πάντα πλουσίως εἰς ἀπόλαυσιν 1 all things richly unto enjoyment By **all**, Paul is referring to all of the things that anyone actually has, not to everything that it might be possible to have. If it is clearer in your language, you may want to include words to make that clear. Alternate translation: “all of the things that we have so that we can enjoy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
1TI 6 17 iq61 figs-ellipsis πάντα πλουσίως εἰς ἀπόλαυσιν 1 all things richly unto enjoyment By **all**, Paul is referring to all of the things that anyone actually has, not to everything that it might be possible to have. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you may want to include words to make that clear. Alternate translation: “all of the things that we have so that we can enjoy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
1TI 6 18 cii3 figs-metaphor πλουτεῖν ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς 1 to be rich in good works Paul speaks figuratively of doing things to help others as a way of becoming wealthy, but it is measured in something other than money. Alternate translation: “to serve and help others in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 6 19 zc9d figs-metaphor ἀποθησαυρίζοντας ἑαυτοῖς θεμέλιον καλὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 storing up for themselves a good foundation for what is coming Paul speaks figuratively about the blessings that God will give to those who have served him faithfully as if they were riches that a person was storing in a safe place. Alternate translation: “securing a good start now on their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1TI 6 19 t493 figs-metaphor ἀποθησαυρίζοντας ἑαυτοῖς θεμέλιον καλὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 storing up for themselves a good foundation for what is coming Paul also speaks figuratively about the blessings that God will give as if they were the foundation of a building. He means that they will give a person a good start on their new life in the presence of God forever. Alternate translation: “securing a good start now on their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2TI 1 17 p022 translate-names Ῥώμῃ 1 Rome This is the name of a city, the capital of the Roman Empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2TI 1 18 p3di translate-blessing δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord Paul is again asking for the Lord to **grant mercy** to Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. See how you translated this in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be merciful to Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord have mercy on Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
|
||||
2TI 1 18 x0eo grammar-connect-logic-result (δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ), καὶ ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord in that day. And how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the action that the first sentence describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
2TI 1 18 r54t writing-pronouns δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord If it is clearer in your language, you can use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternative translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2TI 1 18 r54t writing-pronouns δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternative translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2TI 1 18 x2dk figs-metaphor εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 to find mercy from the Lord Paul speaks of **mercy** as if it were an object that could be found. Paul is expressing his desire that God show **mercy** to Onesiphorus on the day of judgment. Alternate translation: “to receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
2TI 1 18 p024 translate-names Ἐφέσῳ 1 Ephesus This is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -2,8 +2,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of Titus<br><br>1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)<br>2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)<br>3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)<br><br>### Who wrote the book of Titus?<br><br>Paul wrote the book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>### What is the book of Titus about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### In what roles can people serve within the church?<br><br>There are some teachings in the book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural **you**<br><br>In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?<br><br>This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**.
|
||||
TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Elders<br><br>The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Should, may, must<br><br>The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way.
|
||||
TIT 1 1 rtc9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 for the faith **Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you can translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate Translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
TIT 1 1 xyz8 figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 the knowledge Here, **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
TIT 1 1 abc8 figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 of the truth Here, **truth** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use an adjective phrase such as “what is true” or “the true message.” Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
TIT 1 1 xyz8 figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 the knowledge Here, **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
TIT 1 1 abc8 figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 of the truth Here, **truth** is an abstract noun. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use an adjective phrase such as “what is true” or “the true message.” Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
TIT 1 1 fyf8 figs-abstractnouns τῆς κατ’ εὐσέβειαν 1 that agrees with godliness Here, **godliness** is an abstract noun that refers to living in a way that pleases God. Alternate Translation: “that is suitable for honoring God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
TIT 1 2 xyz9 ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ζωῆς αἰωνίου 1 with the certain hope of everlasting life “that gives us the certain hope of everlasting life” or “based on our certain hope for everlasting life”
|
||||
TIT 1 2 r2gj πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 before all the ages of time “before time began”
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ PHM 1 14 fg6l figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑκούσιον. 1 If i
|
|||
PHM 1 15 tcrd figs-activepassive τάχα γὰρ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐχωρίσθη πρὸς ὥραν, ἵνα 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For perhaps the reason that God took Onesimus away from you for a time was so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
PHM 1 15 bx4q figs-idiom πρὸς ὥραν 1 Here, the phrase **for an hour** is an idiom meaning “for a short time.” If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for this short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
PHM 1 16 l3e4 ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 better than a slave Alternate translation: “more valuable than a slave” or “more dear than a slave”
|
||||
PHM 1 16 dg1w οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον 1 This does not mean that Onesimus will no longer be a slave to Philemon. To make this clearer in your language, you can use a word such as “just” or “only.” Alternate translation: “no longer only as a slave”
|
||||
PHM 1 16 dg1w οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον 1 This does not mean that Onesimus will no longer be a slave to Philemon. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use a word such as “just” or “only.” Alternate translation: “no longer only as a slave”
|
||||
PHM 1 16 bynb ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “more valuable than a slave”
|
||||
PHM 1 16 f8tz figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸν 1 a beloved brother Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternative translation, “spiritual brother” or “brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
PHM 1 16 qxi0 ἀγαπητόν 1 Alternate translation: “dear” or “precious”
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2PE 2 12 erfh figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **capture** and **destruction** with verbs. Alternate translation: “in order to capture and destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 12 ipd4 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν βλασφημοῦντες 1 This clause could refer to: (1) more information about the false teachers. Alternate translation: “who slander those things in which they are ignorant” (2) the reason the false teachers will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “because they slander those things in which they are ignorant”
|
||||
2PE 2 12 c4b8 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν 1 Here, **those things** could refer to: (1) the “glorious ones” of [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “who slander those of whom they are ignorant” (2) the Christian teachings that these false teachers are rejecting. Alternate translation: “who slander the teachings of which they are ignorant”
|
||||
2PE 2 12 xzcp writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **their** refer to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers will also be destroyed in their destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 12 xzcp writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **their** refer to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers will also be destroyed in their destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 12 jw8d figs-activepassive καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will also destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
2PE 2 12 h4v8 καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, **also** is used for emphasis and may be translated as “indeed” or “surely.” Alternate translation: “they will indeed be destroyed” or “they will surely be destroyed”
|
||||
2PE 2 12 ai6a ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν 1 This clause indicates the time when the false teachers will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “at the time of their destruction”
|
||||
|
|
@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2PE 2 16 x7zu figs-explicit ἰδίας παρανομίας 1 This **transgression** specifically refers to Balaam’s use of wicked women to lead the Israelites into sexual immorality and idolatry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for his wicked act of leading the Israelites into immorality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
2PE 2 16 xspp figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **irrationality** with an adjective like “irrational” or “foolish.” Alternate translation: “the irrational action of the prophet” or “the foolish action of the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 16 tf38 figs-explicit ἐκώλυσεν τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 restrained the madness of the prophet Here, **the prophet** refers to Balaam. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “restrained the madness of the prophet Balaam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
2PE 2 17 x5rj writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 **These men** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 17 x5rj writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 **These men** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 17 t137 figs-metaphor οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι 1 These men are springs without water Peter speaks figuratively of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect **springs** to provide water to quench thirst, but **waterless springs** leave thirsty people disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternative translation: “These men are disappointing, like springs without water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2PE 2 17 hzu1 figs-metaphor ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 mists driven by a storm Peter gives a second figurative description of the uselessness of the false teachers. When people see storm clouds, they expect rain to fall. When the winds from the **storm** blow the clouds away before the rain can fall, the people are disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way, or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternative translation: “they never give what they promise” or “they are disappointing like rain clouds that the storm drives away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2PE 2 17 von6 figs-doublet οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι, καὶ ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 mists driven by a storm These two metaphors mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “These are men who surely never give what they promise” or “These are men who surely disappoint” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2PE 2 18 cxt8 ὑπέρογκα…ματαιότητος φθεγγόμενοι 1 speaking arrogant things of vanity This clause indicates the means by which the false teachers entice others to sin. Alternate translation: “by means of speaking arrogant things of vanity”
|
||||
2PE 2 18 x2by figs-possession ὑπέρογκα…ματαιότητος 1 speaking arrogant things of vanity Peter is using the possessive form to describe **arrogant** speech that is characterized by **vanity**. Alternate translation: “vain, arrogant things” or “vain and arrogant things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
2PE 2 18 n2pr figs-abstractnouns ματαιότητος 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **vanity** with an adjective, such as “vain.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 18 f8tg writing-pronouns δελεάζουσιν ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 They entice people by the lusts of the flesh Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers entice by the lusts of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 18 f8tg writing-pronouns δελεάζουσιν ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 They entice people by the lusts of the flesh Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers entice by the lusts of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 18 t543 figs-metaphor ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 Here, **flesh** is used figuratively to refer to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this literal meaning for the metaphor. Alternate translation: “by the lusts of their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2PE 2 18 bibq ἀσελγείαις 1 Here, **licentious acts** refers to immoral sexual actions that demonstrate a lack of self-control. See how you translated this term in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “uncontrolled sensual acts”
|
||||
2PE 2 18 nks3 figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀλίγως ἀποφεύγοντας τοὺς ἐν πλάνῃ ἀναστρεφομένους 1 those who are barely escaping from those who live in error Here, Peter speaks figuratively of people who recently became believers as **those barely escaping** from sinful humanity. He also refers to unbelievers who still live according to their sinful desires as **those living in error**. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “people who recently ceased living sinfully as other people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2PE 2 19 n0bh figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ δοῦλοι ὑπάρχοντες τῆς φθορᾶς; 1 Peter uses the word **themselves** here to emphasize the irony of spiritually enslaved people promising spiritual freedom to others. Alternate translation: “while they themselves are slaves of destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 19 v5tt figs-metaphor δοῦλοι 1 Peter speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were **slaves** to sin who need to escape from their captivity. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this as a simile. Alternate translation: “like slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2PE 2 19 xyua figs-possession δοῦλοι…τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that are characterized by **destruction**. Alternate translation: “slaves that will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
2PE 2 19 b79v figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate this non-figuratively or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2PE 2 19 b79v figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this non-figuratively or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2PE 2 19 xqmy figs-activepassive ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
2PE 2 20 v3xc γὰρ 1 Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. Here, **For** does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And”
|
||||
2PE 2 20 q96i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -340,10 +340,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2PE 2 20 ih4w figs-activepassive τούτοις…πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could supply the doer of the action from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “these things having entangled them again; these things have overcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
2PE 2 20 ygag figs-metaphor πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες 1 Here, Peter speaks figuratively of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this is a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2PE 2 20 noa9 writing-pronouns τούτοις 1 Here, the pronoun **these things** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 20 d6ra writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](../02/12.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 20 d6ra writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](../02/12.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 20 d42g figs-nominaladj γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 the last has become worse for them than the first Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||||
2PE 2 21 x7gd grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates the reason why the last condition of the false teachers was worse than their first condition, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
2PE 2 21 e3dv writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 21 e3dv writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 21 xg05 figs-possession τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **righteousness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the righteous way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
2PE 2 21 pm7b figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 the way of righteousness Peter speaks figuratively of life as a **way** or path. This phrase refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md) and “the straight way” in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the manner of living that pleases the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2PE 2 21 lib0 ἐπιγνοῦσιν 1 This clause indicates that the next clause describes an event that happened after the event of this clause. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “after having known it”
|
||||
|
|
@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2PE 2 21 xwid figs-abstractnouns τῆς…ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 2 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **commandment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 21 blr5 figs-activepassive τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 the holy commandment delivered to them If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that the apostles delivered to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
2PE 2 22 hqr3 writing-pronouns συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb Here, **This** refers to the **proverb** Peter states later in this verse. It does not refer back to a statement from the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “What this true proverb says has happened to them” or “This true proverb describes what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 22 pc36 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 22 pc36 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2PE 2 22 h42r writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate what the false teachers have done. These proverbs make a figurative comparison: Just as a dog returns to eat its own vomit and a washed pig rolls in the mud again, so these false teachers, who once stopped living a sinful life, have now gone back to living sinfully. Although they knew “the way of righteousness,” they went back to doing the things that defile them morally and spiritually. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these proverbs as similes. Alternate translation: “They are like dogs that eat their own vomit or like clean pigs that go back to rolling in the mud.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
|
||||
2PE 2 22 xgjp translate-unknown κύων 1 A **dog** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **dog** was an insult. If dogs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2PE 2 22 xycp translate-unknown ὗς 1 A **pig** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **pig** was an insult. If pigs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1JN 1 1 j364 figs-idiom ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the fact that Jesus has always existed. Alternate translation: “from all eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
1JN 1 1 jd7p figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν…ἑωράκαμεν…ἡμῶν…ἐθεασάμεθα…ἡμῶν 1 we have heard … we have seen … our … we have looked at … our Here the pronouns **we** and **our** are exclusive, since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, but the people to whom he is writing did not see Jesus. So use exclusive forms here, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
1JN 1 1 ej5x figs-explicit ἀκηκόαμεν 1 we have heard The implication is that what John and the other eyewitnesses **heard** was Jesus speaking. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can include this information, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “we heard speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
1JN 1 1 rb73 figs-parallelism ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα 1 which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at These two phrases mean the same thing. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. You could combine these phrases and show the emphasis in another way if that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “whom we saw clearly ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 1 1 rb73 figs-parallelism ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα 1 which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at These two phrases mean the same thing. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. You could combine these phrases and show the emphasis in another way If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “whom we saw clearly ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 1 1 j001 figs-explicitinfo ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν…καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν 1 which we have seen with our eyes … and our hands have touched In your language, it might seem that these phrases express unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate them. However, your language may have its own way of using such extra information for emphasis, and you could also do that in your translation. Alternate translation: “we saw … and touched” or “we saw with our own eyes … and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||||
1JN 1 1 j002 figs-explicit ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν…αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν 1 which we have seen with our eyes … and our hands have touched The false teachers were denying that Jesus was a real human being and saying that he was only a spirit. But the implications of what John is saying here are that Jesus was a real human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
1JN 1 1 j003 περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς 1 regarding the Word of life As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, you could put your translation of this phrase, **regarding the Word of life**, at the beginning of this verse and present it as a sentence of its own as a topical introduction to the letter, as UST does. Alternate translation: “We are writing to you about Jesus, the Word of life”
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1JN 2 2 j047 writing-pronouns αὐτὸς 1 he The pronoun **he** here refers to Jesus, the antecedent in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
1JN 2 2 h8fg figs-abstractnouns αὐτὸς ἱλασμός ἐστιν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν, οὐ περὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων δὲ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 he is the propitiation for our sins, and not for ours only, but also for the whole world The abstract noun **propitiation** refers to something that someone does for someone else or gives to someone else so that he will no longer be angry. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus, God is no longer angry about our sins, and not only about ours, but also about those of the whole world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
1JN 2 2 j048 figs-metonymy ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 the whole world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it figuratively refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “everyone in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
1JN 2 2 m14q figs-ellipsis οὐ περὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων δὲ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 John leaves out the word for “sins” in these clauses because it is understood from the previous clause. If it is clearer in your language, you can include it. Alternate translation: “and not only for our sins, but also for the sins of the whole world”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
1JN 2 2 m14q figs-ellipsis οὐ περὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων δὲ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 John leaves out the word for “sins” in these clauses because it is understood from the previous clause. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can include it. Alternate translation: “and not only for our sins, but also for the sins of the whole world”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
1JN 2 3 j049 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐγνώκαμεν αὐτόν, ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν 1 in this we know that we have known him, if we keep his commandments If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “if we obey what he has commanded, then we can be assured that we have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
1JN 2 3 ubc9 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐγνώκαμεν αὐτόν, ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν 1 If your language would not use a conditional statement with **if** for something that is true, you can express the same idea using a word like “by” or another way. Alternate translation: “there is a way to be sure that we truly know God. This is by obeying his commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||||
1JN 2 3 j050 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι 1 in this we know that This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “this is how we know that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1JN 2 28 j142 figs-metaphor μένετε ἐν αὐτῷ 1 remain in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, John seems to be using the expression in the same way that he has just used it in [2:27](../02/27.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “continue to have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1JN 2 28 j143 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…ἐὰν φανερωθῇ…ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ…αὐτοῦ 1 him … when he appears … by him … his The pronouns **him**, **he**, and **his** likely refer to Jesus in this verse, since John speaks of his **coming** or return. Consider whether it might be clearer or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
1JN 2 28 zz4x figs-activepassive ἐὰν φανερωθῇ 1 when he appears See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term could have either an active or a passive meaning. In either case, John is not saying that Jesus will only appear to return. (1) If the meaning is active, John is speaking of the act of Jesus physically returning to earth. Alternate translation: “when Jesus returns” (2) If the meaning is passive, John is speaking of God revealing Jesus to the world as its true king. To bring out that meaning, you could translate this with a passive verbal form or, if your language does not use passive forms, you could use an active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when Jesus is revealed” or “when God reveals Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
1JN 2 28 j144 figs-parallelism σχῶμεν παρρησίαν, καὶ μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 we may have boldness and not be put to shame by him These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. You could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression if that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “we may be completely confident at his coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 2 28 j144 figs-parallelism σχῶμεν παρρησίαν, καὶ μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 we may have boldness and not be put to shame by him These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. You could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “we may be completely confident at his coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 2 28 lnk2 figs-abstractnouns σχῶμεν παρρησίαν 1 we may have boldness If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
1JN 2 28 d4ql figs-synecdoche μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him John is using the word **him**, meaning Jesus, figuratively to mean the presence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
1JN 2 28 j145 figs-activepassive μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -371,14 +371,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1JN 3 18 g6uh figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 Little children See how you translated this in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1JN 3 18 p91w figs-doublet μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 let us not love in word, nor in tongue The phrases **in word** and **in tongue** mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
1JN 3 18 j203 figs-metonymy μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 let us not love in word, nor in tongue John is using the phrases **in word** and **in tongue** figuratively to refer to what a person says. Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
1JN 3 18 b4mm figs-hyperbole μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 John is not saying that we should never express love through words. He is using hyperbole to make a contrast between words and actions. If this would be clearer in your language you can include a word such as “only” or “merely.” Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
1JN 3 18 b4mm figs-hyperbole μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 John is not saying that we should never express love through words. He is using hyperbole to make a contrast between words and actions. If it would be misunderstood in your language you can include a word such as “only” or “merely.” Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
1JN 3 18 j204 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 but in deed and truth John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but let us love in deed and in truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
1JN 3 18 j205 figs-hendiadys ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 in deed and truth John is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **truth** indicates the quality that loving **in deed** would have. Alternate translation: “truly, in actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 d70n checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 19. Suggested heading: “Have Confidence When You Pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 j206 translate-versebridge ἐν τούτῳ γνωσόμεθα…καὶ…πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 In this we will know … and we will persuade our hearts John describes a result in this verse. He gives the reason for that result in the next verse. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could put [3:20](../03/20.md) first in your translation, making it a separate sentence and leaving out both instances of the word “that.” You could put this verse next, translating it as in the following suggestions. Alternate translation: “That is how we can know … and how we can persuade our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 k2rv ἐν τούτῳ 1 **In this** could refer either to: (1) What John has just said in verse 18. Alternate translation: “If we do that” (2) What John is about to say in verse 20. Alternate translation: “I will tell you how”
|
||||
1JN 3 19 j207 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γνωσόμεθα 1 In this we will know This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “This is how we can know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 j208 figs-parallelism γνωσόμεθα, ὅτι ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν, καὶ…πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 we will know that we are from the truth and we will persuade our hearts The phrases **we will know** and **we will persuade our hearts** mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. You could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression if that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “we will be completely convinced that we are from the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 j208 figs-parallelism γνωσόμεθα, ὅτι ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν, καὶ…πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 we will know that we are from the truth and we will persuade our hearts The phrases **we will know** and **we will persuade our hearts** mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. You could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “we will be completely convinced that we are from the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 qx9c figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν 1 we are from the truth This could mean one of two things. (1) John could be referring figuratively to God by association with the way that God is true. In other words, God always tells **the truth** and does what he says. Alternate translation: “we are from God, who is true” (2) As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the word **truth** could refer to the true teaching that believers have received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “we are conducting our lives according to the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 j209 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν 1 we are from the truth If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “we are from the One who is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
1JN 3 19 j210 figs-idiom ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν 1 we are from the truth See how you translated the expression in [3:10](../03/10.md) that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “we belong to God” or “we are living in relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
1JN 3 20 f594 figs-metaphor ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 if our heart condemns us John continues speaking figuratively of the **heart** to mean the thoughts and feelings. There may be a similar expression in your language. Alternate translation: “if our feelings condemn us” or “if our thoughts accuse us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1JN 3 20 j214 figs-explicit ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 if our heart condemns us The topic here, continuing from [3:19](../03/19.md), is how we can know that “we are from the truth,” so this is likely a reference to needing reassurance about that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if we ever feel that we do not belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
1JN 3 20 j215 figs-possession ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία…τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 our heart … our heart If it would be unusual in your language to speak of one **heart** in reference to many people, and if you decide to retain the word **heart** as a metaphor in your translation, you can make it plural. Alternate translation: “our hearts … our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
1JN 3 20 j216 figs-parallelism μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα 1 God is greater than our heart and knows everything Since John is using the **heart** figuratively to mean the thoughts and feelings, the statement that **God is greater than our heart** likely means that God knows and understands more than we do and that God has greater compassion for us than we have for ourselves. In that case, the phrases **is greater than our heart** and **knows everything** would mean similar things. You could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression if that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 3 20 j216 figs-parallelism μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα 1 God is greater than our heart and knows everything Since John is using the **heart** figuratively to mean the thoughts and feelings, the statement that **God is greater than our heart** likely means that God knows and understands more than we do and that God has greater compassion for us than we have for ourselves. In that case, the phrases **is greater than our heart** and **knows everything** would mean similar things. You could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression If it would be misunderstood in your language. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
1JN 3 20 lv7z figs-explicit μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα 1 God is greater than our heart and knows everything The implications are that, given God’s greater knowledge, we should believe what he has said rather than what our thoughts and feelings are saying. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him, and so we should believe that because he has said so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
1JN 3 21 rf96 figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated this in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||||
1JN 3 21 j217 figs-hypo ἐὰν ἡ καρδία μὴ καταγινώσκῃ, παρρησίαν ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Θεόν, 1 if the heart does not condemn, we have confidence toward God John discusses another hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose our hearts do not condemn us. Then we have confidence toward God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
|
|||
2JN 1 8 r9ky figs-exclusive εἰργασάμεθα 1 we have worked for The word **we** here is inclusive. John, his audience, and others have all worked to build up the faith of the believers to whom John is writing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
2JN 1 9 mn3v figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 everyone who goes beyond and does not remain in the teaching of Christ John refers to **the teaching of Christ** figuratively as a place where faithful believers **remain** and also as a place that false teachers leave as they go **beyond**. The expression **goes beyond** refers to teaching new and false things that Jesus did not teach. Alternate translation: “everyone who teaches things that Jesus did not teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2JN 1 9 x3ae figs-infostructure πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Everyone who goes beyond and does not remain in the teaching of Christ These two phrases mean the same thing, one stated positively (**goes beyond**) and the other stated negatively (**does not remain**). If it is mote natural in your language, you can reverse the order of these, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||||
2JN 1 9 xty9 figs-explicit Θεὸν οὐκ ἔχει 1 does not have God To **have God** means to have a relationship with God as Savior through faith in Jesus Christ. If it is clearer in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not belong to God” or “does not have a right relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
2JN 1 9 xty9 figs-explicit Θεὸν οὐκ ἔχει 1 does not have God To **have God** means to have a relationship with God as Savior through faith in Jesus Christ. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not belong to God” or “does not have a right relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
2JN 1 9 x523 ὁ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, οὗτος καὶ τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱὸν ἔχει 1 The one who remains in the teaching, this one has both the Father and the Son “Someone who follows Christ’s teaching belongs to both the Father and the Son”
|
||||
2JN 1 9 xwoe grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ 1 The one who remains in the teaching This phrase is in contrast to the previous sentence. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can use a word or phrase to mark this contrast, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||||
2JN 1 9 vg19 figs-nominaladj οὗτος 1 this one John is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun, to refer to a kind of person. ULT indicates this by adding the word **one**. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “such a person” or “that kind of person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ JUD 1 21 okfy figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to all believers
|
|||
JUD 1 21 qb29 grammar-connect-logic-result τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Jude is using **to** to introduce the result of **the mercy**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the mercy of our Lord Jesus Christ, which brings eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
JUD 1 22 ynz1 figs-abstractnouns ἐλεᾶτε 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “act mercifully toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
JUD 1 22 wbr5 οὓς…διακρινομένους 1 The phrase **some who are doubting** refers to people who have become confused because of the teaching and activities of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “some who are uncertain about what to believe”
|
||||
JUD 1 23 gx9t ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες 1 This clause indicates the means by which Jude wants his audience to save a certain group of people. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of snatching from fire”
|
||||
JUD 1 23 gx9t ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες 1 This clause indicates the means by which Jude wants his audience to save a certain group of people. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of snatching from fire”
|
||||
JUD 1 23 wkj9 figs-metaphor ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες 1 Here Jude speaks figuratively of urgently rescuing some people from going to hell as though it was like pulling people from a **fire** before they start to burn. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative manner or use a simile. Alternate translation: “doing whatever must be done to keep them from going to hell” or “doing whatever must be done to save them, as if pulling them from fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
JUD 1 23 ign7 figs-abstractnouns ἐλεᾶτε 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “act mercifully toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
JUD 1 23 uavk ἐν φόβῳ 1 This phrase indicates the manner by which Jude wanted his readers to have mercy on a certain group of people. Alternate translation: “by being cautious”
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Loading…
Reference in New Issue